OPERATOR'S MANUAL
SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
FS-1570
FS-2570
FS-5070
MODEL
www.furuno.co.jp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.
・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax
: +81-(0)798-65-4200
A : NOV 2006
.
Printed in Japan
All rights reserved.
C2 : JUL. 17, 2008
Pub. No. OME-56560-C2
(TATA ) FS-1570/2570/5070
*00016050112*
*00016050112*
* 0 0 0 1 6 0 5 0 1 1 2 *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
• This manual is intended for use by native speakers of English.
• No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced without written permission.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications are subject to change
without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual may not match the
screens you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system
configuration and equipment settings.
• Store this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
• FURUNO will assume no responsibility for the damage caused by improper use or
modification of the equipment (including software) by an unauthorized agent or a third
party.
• Dispose of the equipment according to local regulations.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The user and installer must read the appropriate safety instructions before attempting to install
or operate the equipment.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
DANGER
WARNING
death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Mandatory Action
Prohibitive Action
Warning, Caution
DANGER
Never touch the SSB antenna, antenna
coupler or lead-in insulator when the
SSB radiotelephone is transmitting.
WARNING
Immediately turn off the power at the
switchboard if the equipment is emitting
smoke or fire.
High voltage which will cause death or
serious injury is present at the locations
shown in the illustration below when the
SSB radiotelephone is transmitting.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
agent for service.
Antenna
Wire
Indoor
Do not place liquid-filled containers on
the top of the equipment.
Antenna Wire
(High Voltage)
Lead-in
Insulator
(High
Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid
spills into the equipment.
Antenna
Coupler
Voltage)
Do not operate the equipment with
wet hands.
Electrical shock can result.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Turn off the power immediately
if you feel the equipment is behaving
abnormally.
Only qualified personnel should work
inside the equipment.
Turn off the power at the switchboard if
the equipment becomes abnormally warm
or is emitting odd noises. Contact a
FURUNO dealer or agent for advice.
Immediately turn off the power at the
switchboard if water leaks into the
equipment or something is dropped
into the equipment.
Make sure no rain or water splash leaks
into the equipment.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
agent for service.
Fire or electrical shock can result if water
leaks in the equipment.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
Use the proper fuse.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire
or electrical shock.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not operate the [DISTRESS] button
except in case of a life-endangering
situation on your vessel.
If the distress alert is accidentally
transmitted, contact the nearest coast
station and inform them of the accidental
transmission, providing the following data:
Operating the [DISTRESS] button
transmits the distress alert. Accidental
transmission may prevent search and
rescue operations for actual emergency.
If the distress alert is accidentally
transmitted, contact the nearest station
to cancel the alert.
a) Ship's name
b) Ship's call sign and DSC number
c) Position at time of transmission
d) Time of transmission
Do not apply strong pressure to the
LCD, which is made of glass.
Injury can result if the LCD breaks.
WARNING LABEL(S)
Do not remove any safety label.
If a label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement.
Name: Danger Label
Type: 05-062-0213-0
Code No.: 100-199-230
Hazardous voltage.
DANGER
,
,
Can shock burn
or cause death.
Do not touch antenna
,
wire insulator and
terminal.
ANTENNA
COUPLER
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011
Code No.: 100-236-231
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
TRANSCEIVER
UNIT
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISTRESS ALERT MESSAGE
PROCEDURE
Below is the procedure for transmitting a distress alert via radiotelephone. Transmit the
distress alert when a life-endangering situation occurs on your vessel.
1. Open the DISTRESS button cover and press the DISTRESS button more than four
seconds to show the following display, then release the DISTRESS button.
Distress button
pressed!
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12°34.0000 N
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
2182.0 kHz
2187.5kHz
KEEP PRESSED FOR 2S
2. After the distress message has been transmitted, the following displays appear in order.
Wait for distress
acknowledgement.
Distress acknowledge
message received.
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12 34.5678N
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
When distress message is
acknowledged by coast
station (usually within
123 45.6789E
AT 12:34
POS: 12 34.5678N DIST: 0nm
TELEPHONE
123 45.6789E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE 2182.0 kHz
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO: 2M10S
2. 4. 6. 8. 12. 16. M
RESENDING
1 min to 2 min 45 seconds)
3. The audio alarm sounds; press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm.
4. Communicate with the coast station via radiotelephone as below.
Say MAYDAY three times.
Say “This is …” name of your vessel and your message sign three times.
Give nature of distress and assistance needed.
Give description of your vessel (type, number of persons onboard, etc.) and any other
information which may aid in rescue.
Note: If the distress message is not acknowledged by coast station, it will be transmitted
again after 3 min 30 seconds to 4 min 30 seconds.
For IC-302 (option) operation
1. Open the DISTRESS button cover and press the DISTRESS button more than four
seconds.
2. After the distress message has been transmitted, the length of the beep changes from
short to long.
3. Release the DISTRESS button.
4. Do step 4 shown in the Distress Alert Message Procedure above with the
radiotelephone.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CANCELING DISTRESS ALERT
You can cancel the distress call while
it is being sent or while waiting for its acknowledgement as follows.
1. Press the CANCEL key.
When the following message appears, do the following.
Distress Proc. is
Paused.
P
RESUME RESEND CANCEL
123 45.6789E
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO :
:
2187.5 kHz
0S
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose CANCEL at the screen, and then push the ENTER
knob.
Warning:
Distress Cancel Step
P
YES
NO
123 45.6789E
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO :
:
2187.5 kHz
0S
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and then push the ENTER knob to show the
following screen.
Distress Cancellation Proc.
Select frequency
and push ENTER.
Cancel: Back to pause menu.
123 45.6789E
2M-2187.5 kHz
4M-4207.5kHz
6M-6312.0kHz
8M-8414.5kHz
12M-12577.0kHz
16M-16804.5kHz
The cancellation message is transmitted over the same frequency used to transmit the
distress call.
Now Transmitting Distress
Cancellation Message
P
123 45.6789E
2M-2187.5 kHz
4M-4207.5kHz
6M-6312.0kHz
8M-8414.5kHz
12M-12577.0kHz
16M-16804.5kHz
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CANCELLING DISTRESS ALERT
4. Communicate, via radiotelephone, with the coast station.
Send cancel msg. by voice
on 2182.0 kHz.
Push any key: Go next step.
123 45.6789E
*2M-2187.5 kHz
4M-4207.5kHz
6M-6312.0kHz
8M-8414.5kHz
12M-12577.0kHz
16M-16804.5kHz
Asterisk marks the frequency over which
the cancellation call was transmitted..
5. Press any key.
If you used other frequencies to send the distress call, cancel distress call on those
frequencies by repeating steps 3 to 5.
When all cancellation is completed, the RT display appears.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD...................................................................................................... xii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ........................................................................... xiv
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW.........................................................................1-1
1.1 Controls..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Turning the Power On/Off .......................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Radiotelephone (RT) Screen ..................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 DSC Standby Screen.................................................................................................1-3
1.5 Control Unit Dimmer, Contrast ................................................................................... 1-4
1.6 Loudspeaker.............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.7 Setting Scan Frequencies.......................................................................................... 1-4
1.8 Setting for Auto Acknowledgement ............................................................................ 1-5
1.9 System Characteristics.............................................................................................. 1-5
1.9.1 Equipment priority ........................................................................................... 1-5
1.9.2 Controls become inoperative........................................................................... 1-5
1.9.3 Controls become operative.............................................................................. 1-5
1.9.4 Automatic setting of working frequency ........................................................... 1-6
1.10 Intercom .................................................................................................................... 1-6
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE.............................................................................2-1
2.1 Choosing Class of Emission ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Choosing Channel, Frequency .................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Transmitting............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.1 Transmitting procedure.................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2 Reducing transmitter power............................................................................. 2-4
2.3.3 Condition of the transmitting unit ..................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Receiving................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 RF gain (sensitivity) adjustment....................................................................... 2-5
2.4.2 S-meter ........................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.3 Receiving AM broadcasting stations................................................................2-6
2.4.4 Squelch function.............................................................................................. 2-6
2.4.5 Noise blanker .................................................................................................. 2-6
2.5 When Automatic Tuning Fails .................................................................................... 2-7
2.6 User Channels........................................................................................................... 2-8
3. DSC OVERVIEW...........................................................................................3-1
3.1 What is DSC?............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 DSC Message ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Audio Alarms ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.4 Interpreting Call Displays........................................................................................... 3-4
3.4.1 Receive calls................................................................................................... 3-4
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.4.2 Send calls....................................................................................................... 3-5
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS ............................................................................4-1
4.1 Sending Distress Alert............................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Sending distress alert by DISTRESS button, nature of distress not specified . 4-2
4.1.2 Sending distress alert by DISTRESS button, nature of distress specified ....... 4-4
4.2 Receiving a Distress Alert.......................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.1 Distress alert received on MF band................................................................. 4-7
4.2.2 Distress alert received on HF band................................................................4-10
4.3 Sending Distress Relay on Behalf of a Ship in Distress............................................4-14
4.3.1 Sending distress relay to coast station...........................................................4-14
4.3.2 Sending distress relay to area ships ..............................................................4-18
4.4 Receiving Distress Relay from Coast Station............................................................4-21
4.5 Cancelling Distress Call ...........................................................................................4-21
5. RoutINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEIVING ...............................................5-1
5.1 Individual Call............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Sending an individual call................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 Receiving an individual call............................................................................. 5-7
5.2 Group Call................................................................................................................5-12
5.2.1 Sending a group call......................................................................................5-12
5.2.2 Receiving a group call....................................................................................5-14
5.3 Geographical Area Call ............................................................................................5-15
5.3.1 Sending a geographical area call...................................................................5-16
5.3.2 Receiving a geographical area call ................................................................5-17
5.4 Neutral Craft Call......................................................................................................5-19
5.4.1 Sending a neutral craft call.............................................................................5-19
5.4.2 Receiving a neutral craft call..........................................................................5-20
5.5 Medical Transport Call..............................................................................................5-21
5.5.1 Sending a medical transport call ....................................................................5-21
5.5.2 Receiving a medical transport call..................................................................5-23
5.6 Receiving a Polling Request.....................................................................................5-24
5.6.1 Automatic reply..............................................................................................5-24
5.6.3 Manual reply..................................................................................................5-25
5.7 Position Call .............................................................................................................5-26
5.7.1 Requesting other ship’s position ....................................................................5-26
5.7.2 Position call: other ship requests your position...............................................5-28
5.8 PSTN Call ................................................................................................................5-30
5.8.1 Sending a PSTN call, receiving acknowledge back (ACK BQ).......................5-30
5.8.2 Receiving a PSTN call, sending acknowledge back (ACK BQ) ......................5-33
5.8.3 PSTN call disconnection, receiving charge information
(ship disconnects line)....................................................................................5-35
5.8.4 PSTN call disconnection, receiving charge information
(coast station disconnects line) ......................................................................5-36
5.9 Log File ....................................................................................................................5-36
5.9.1 Opening a log file...........................................................................................5-36
5.9.2 Deleting log files ............................................................................................5-37
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6. MENU OPERATION ......................................................................................6-1
6.1 Adjusting Handset Volume......................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Noise Blanker ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3 Squelch Frequency.................................................................................................... 6-2
6.4 User Channels........................................................................................................... 6-2
6.4.1 Registering user channels............................................................................... 6-2
6.4.2 Deleting user channels.................................................................................... 6-4
6.5 Preparing TX Message .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.5.1 Preparing individual calls................................................................................. 6-4
6.5.2 Preparing group calls ...................................................................................... 6-7
6.5.3 Preparing PSTN calls...................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.4 Preparing test call.......................................................................................... 6-10
6.5.5 Sending prepared messages......................................................................... 6-11
6.5.6 Deleting send message................................................................................. 6-11
6.5.7 Printing List of Send Message Files .............................................................. 6-12
6.6 Manual Entry of Position and Time .......................................................................... 6-12
6.7 Date and Time Setting ............................................................................................. 6-14
6.8 Memory Clear.......................................................................................................... 6-14
6.9 Setting Alarms ......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.10 Sound Setting..........................................................................................................6-17
6.11 Setting the AUTO ACK Details................................................................................. 6-18
6.12 Printing Messages................................................................................................... 6-19
6.13 Setting Scan Frequencies........................................................................................ 6-20
6.14 Key Assignment....................................................................................................... 6-22
6.15 Special Messages.................................................................................................... 6-22
6.16 FAX Enable/Disable................................................................................................. 6-23
6.17 Speaker Setting in Off Hook..................................................................................... 6-23
6.18 Operation Timer Off ................................................................................................. 6-23
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW.........................................................................7-1
7.1 Turning on the NBDP System.................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Description of Equipment........................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Terminal unit.................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Keyboard......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Function Keys, Menu Operation................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.1 Menu conventions ...........................................................................................7-4
7.3.2 Menu overview................................................................................................ 7-5
7.3.3 Function key description.................................................................................. 7-6
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS................................................................................8-1
8.1 Registering Answerback Code & ID Codes................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Registering answerback code ......................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Registering ID codes....................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Station List................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.1 Registering stations......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Editing/Deleting stations.................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Timer Programming ................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1 Registering timer programs ............................................................................. 8-5
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.3.2 Editing/Deleting timer programs...................................................................... 8-6
8.4 User Channels .......................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.1 Registering user channels............................................................................... 8-6
8.4.2 Editing/Deleting user channels........................................................................ 8-7
8.5 Scan Channel Groups............................................................................................... 8-7
8.5.1 Registering scan channel groups.................................................................... 8-7
8.5.2 Editing/Deleting scan channel groups............................................................. 8-8
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS ...........................................................................9-1
9.1 Opening and Closing Files ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 Creating Files............................................................................................................ 9-1
9.3 Saving a File ............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.1 Formatting floppy disks................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.2 Saving a file.................................................................................................... 9-3
9.4 Editing Files............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.4.1 Cutting and pasting text .................................................................................. 9-3
9.4.2 Copying and pasting text................................................................................. 9-4
9.4.3 Select all......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.4 Searching text................................................................................................. 9-5
9.4.5 Replacing text................................................................................................. 9-6
9.4.6 Goto line ......................................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.7 Goto top, Goto bottom .................................................................................... 9-6
9.5 Opening Files............................................................................................................ 9-7
9.5.1 Opening a file.................................................................................................. 9-7
9.5.2 Switching between files................................................................................... 9-7
9.6 Renaming Files ......................................................................................................... 9-7
9.7 Saving a File Under a New Name ............................................................................. 9-8
9.8 Deleting Files ............................................................................................................ 9-8
9.9 Real Time Printing..................................................................................................... 9-8
9.10 Printing Files ............................................................................................................. 9-8
10.
NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING..................................................10-1
10.1 Manual Calling .........................................................................................................10-1
10.2 ARQ Mode Operation...............................................................................................10-3
10.3 FEC Mode Operation ...............................................................................................10-5
10.4 Choosing Receive Mode ..........................................................................................10-5
10.5 Communication Example..........................................................................................10-6
10.6 Timer Operation .......................................................................................................10-8
10.6.1Enabling timer operation................................................................................10-8
10.6.2Stopping timer operation................................................................................10-9
10.7 Scanning..................................................................................................................10-9
10.8 Communication Buffer............................................................................................10-10
10.9 Preparing Macrofiles for Automatic Telex................................................................10-10
10.9.1Automatic telex overview .............................................................................10-10
10.9.2Preparations ................................................................................................10-11
10.9.3Commands ..................................................................................................10-12
10.9.4Store-and-forward method ...........................................................................10-13
10.10 Automatic Telex using Macrofile ........................................................................10-17
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
11.
MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................... 11-1
11.1 Radiotelephone Test................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................ 11-2
11.3 Simple Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 11-3
11.4 Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 11-4
11.5 Replacement of Fuses............................................................................................. 11-5
11.6 Test Call................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.7 NBDP Terminal Unit Maintenance............................................................................ 11-8
11.7.1 Cleaning the equipment ................................................................................ 11-8
11.7.2 Connectors and earth connection.................................................................. 11-8
11.7.3 Floppy disk drive ........................................................................................... 11-8
11.7.4 Diagnostics ................................................................................................... 11-8
APPENDIX ......................................................................................................AP-1
Menu Tree ...................................................................................................................... AP-1
NBDP terminal unit (telex) ...................................................................................... AP-2
Frequency Tables............................................................................................................ AP-3
Digital Interface (IEC 61162-1)...................................................................................... AP-17
Parts List....................................................................................................................... AP-22
Parts Location............................................................................................................... AP-26
INDEX............................................................................................................... IN-1
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOREWORD
Thank you for purchasing the FS-1570/2570/5070 SSB Radiotelephone. We are confident
you will discover why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
Dedicated in the design and manufacture of marine electronics equipment for 60 years,
FURUNO Electric Company has gained an unrivaled reputation as a world leader in the
industry. This is the result of our technical excellence as well as our worldwide distribution
and service network.
Please carefully read and follow the safety information and operating and maintenance
instructions set forth in this manual before attempting to operate the equipment and conduct
any maintenance. Your unit will perform to the utmost of its ability only if it is operated and
maintained in accordance with the correct procedures.
Features
The FS-1570/2570/5070 is an MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone with a built-in DSC/Watch
Receiver, all contained in a surprisingly compact cabinet. An NBDP (Narrow Band Direct
Printing) Terminal Unit is optionally available.
Data is displayed on a large, easy-to-read backlit LCD. Operation is simplified by the use of
few keys and easy-to-follow menus.
The built-in DSC/watch receiver produces and receives digital selective calls for quick and
efficient establishment of distress, urgency, safety and routine communications with other
ships and coast stations that install any MF/HF DSC facilities.
The main features are
General
Fully meets the following regulations: IMO A.806(19), IMO A.694(17), IMO A. 813(19), MSC
68(68) Annex 3, IEC 61097-3 Annex A, IEC 61162-1 (2000), IEC 60945 (2002),
EN 300 373-1 (2002), ETS 300 067A1(1998), EN 300 338(2004), EN 301 033 (2005),
ITU-R M.493-11, M.541-9, M.476-5, M.491-1, M.492-6, M.625-3, M.1173-3.
Automatic entry of position with manual override
Optional printer can automatically print out DSC and NBDP received messages and test
results.
SSB
•
•
•
Receiving voice communication, telex and AM.
Facsimile signal receiving
Simplified setting of channel and frequency.
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOREWORD
DSC/watch receiver
•
•
•
•
•
Distress, urgency, safety and routine calling
Scanning of DSC frequencies for distress and general calls on MF/HF
File editing capability for readiness in case of emergency
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) capability standard
Log stores 50 each of latest ordinary, distress and transmitted messages, in separate
memory blocks.
NBDP (with optional NBDP Terminal Unit IB-583)
•
Automatic error-free telex communications and distress message in compliance with
GMDSS requirements
•
•
•
•
LCD monitor and keyboard comply with ITU regulations
Pop-up menus for user-friendly operation
Memory for 256 operator-customized channels
Real time message printing with Printer PP-510
Program Number
FS-1570/2570/5070
PC board
MAIN
Program No.
Ver. No.
Remarks
0550225
01
Main program
PANEL
0550222
0550207
0550208
01
01
01
Program for the control display
MODEM Program for DSC
MODEM Program for NBDP
DSP (DSC)
NBDP
Terminal Unit IB-581 (optional unit, for FS-1570/2570 only)
PC Board
TERMINAL
Program No.
0550210
Ver. No
1.22
Remarks
Remarks
Terminal Unit IB-583 (optional unit)
Program
TERMINAL
Program No.
0550209
Ver. No
1.22
About the TFT LCD: The TFT LCD is constructed using the latest LCD techniques, and
displays99.99% of its pixels. The remaining 0.01%of the pixels may drop out or blink,
however this is not an indication of malfunction.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
FS-1570
Standard configuration is shown with solid line.
DSC DISTRESS
SAFETY FREQUENCY
#
# = 2.6 m
whip
antenna
ANTENNA COUPLER
AT-1560-15
PREAMP UNIT
FAX-5
LOUDSPEAKER
SEM-21Q
EPFS (GNSS)
CONTROL
UNIT
FS-2571C
HANDSET
HS-2003
CONTROLLER 1
INCOMING
INDICATOR
IC-303-DSC
PRINTER
PP-510
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
FS-1570T
MIF EQUIPMENT
INTERFACE
IF-8500*
24VDC
NBDP
TERMINAL UNIT
IB-583/IB-581
* = Required for NBDP Terminal
and DSC to share printer.
DISTRESS ALERT UNIT
IC-302-DSC
24VDC
BK INTERFACE
BK-300
HANDSET
HS-2003
CONTROL UNIT
FS-2571C
CONTROLLER 2
POWER STATUS
MONITOR
AC/DC POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
PR-300
PSM-01
24VDC
100-115/200-230VAC
, 50/60Hz
1
φ
Exposed to weather
Exposed to weather
Protected from weather
Preamp Unit
Antenna Coupler
Other Units
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
FS-2570
Standard configuration is shown with solid line.
DSC DISTRESS
SAFETY FREQUENCY
DSC ROUTINE
FREQUENCY
#
#
# = 2.6 m
whip
ANTENNA COUPLER
AT-1560-25
PREAMP UNIT
PREAMP UNIT
FAX-5
FAX-5
antenna
LOUDSPEAKER
SEM-21Q
EPFS (GNSS)
W/R BOARD
CONTROL
UNIT
FS-2571C
HANDSET
HS-2003
CONTROLLER 1
INCOMING
INDICATOR
IC-303-DSC
PRINTER
PP-510
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
FS-2570T
MIF EQUIPMENT
INTERFACE
IF-8500*
24VDC
NBDP
TERMINAL UNIT
IB-583/IB-581
* = Required for NBDP Terminal
and DSC to share printer.
DISTRESS ALERT UNIT
IC-302-DSC
DC24V
BK INTERFACE
BK-300
HANDSET
HS-2003
CONTROL UNIT
FS-2571C
CONTROLLER 2
POWER STATUS
MONITOR
AC/DC POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
PR-850A
PSM-01
24VDC
100-115/200-230VAC
, 50/60Hz
1
φ
Unit
Category
Exposed to weather
Exposed to weather
Protected from weather
Preamp Unit
Antenna Coupler
Other Units
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
FS-5070
Standard configuration is shown with solid line.
DSC DISTRESS
SAFETY FREQUENCY
DSC ROUTINE
FREQUENCY
#
#
# = 2.6 m
ANTENNA COUPLER
AT-5000
PREAMP UNIT
FAX-5
PREAMP UNIT
whip
FAX-5
antenna
LOUDSPEAKER
SEM-21Q
EPFS (GNSS)
W/R BOARD
CONTROL
UNIT
FS-2571C
HANDSET
HS-2003
CONTROLLER 1
INCOMING
INDICATOR
IC-303-DSC
PRINTER
PP-510
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
FS-5070T
MIF EQUIPMENT
INTERFACE
IF-8500*
24VDC
NBDP
TERMINAL UNIT
IB-583
DISTRESS ALERT UNIT
IC-302-DSC
* = Required for NBDP Terminal
and DSC to share printer.
24VDC
BK INTERFACE
BK-300
HANDSET
HS-2003
CONTROL UNIT
FS-2571C
CONTROLLER 2
POWER STATUS
AC/DC POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
PR-850A
MONITOR
PSM-01
24VDC
100-115/200-230VAC
1φ, 50/60Hz
Unit
Category
Exposed to weather
Exposed to weather
Protected from weather
Preamp Unit
Antenna Coupler
Other Units
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.1
Controls
Description of controls
Function
Control
PWR/VOL knob
• Turns the power on/off.
• Adjusts volume.
DISTRESS
button
Press and hold down the button more than four (4) seconds to transmit
the distress alert.
CALL key
Transmits DSC messages.
ENTER knob
CANCEL key
Rotate to choose menu items; push to register selection.
• Cancels wrong data.
• Restores previous menu.
• Silences audio alarm.
• Cancels transmission, printing.
• Erases error message.
1/ RT/CH key
Switches to the radiotelephone (RT) screen. Press and hold down more
than five (5) seconds to set SSB: 2182.0 kHz/J3E.
2/DSC key
Composes DSC TX message.
3/TEST key
4/IntCom key
5/ ACK/SQ key
Executes daily test and TX self-check.
Turns on/off the intercom with other Control Unit FS-2571C.
DSC: Switches automatic and manual acknowledge alternately.
Radiotelephone: Turns squelch on and off.
• Displays DSC screen.
6/SCAN key
• Starts/stops scanning of DSC routine frequencies, on the DSC standby
screen.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
7/ key
Turns loudspeaker on/off.
(Note that this key does not silence the distress or urgency alarm.)
8/PRINT key
Prints communications log files, current screen (except DSC standby
screen and radiotelephone screen) and test results.
Adjusts panel dimmer and LCD contrast.
9/
key
*/FILE/CURSOR
key
• Opens the send message file list from the DSC standby screen, to send
stored message.
• Shifts cursor.
0/LOG/TUNE key
• Long press: Tunes antenna in radiotelephone operation.
• Momentary press: Displays message logs.
Opens the main menu.
#/SETUP key
ALARM lamp
• Flashes in red for distress and urgency messages.
• Flashes in green for safety and routine messages.
Lights (in green) when mains switchboard is on.
OVEN lamp
1.2
Turning the Power On/Off
Turn the PWR/VOL knob clockwise at the right-hand side of the control unit to power the
system. The RT screen appears.
Rotate the PWR/VOL knob counterclockwise to turn the system off.
In the dual control unit system, the control unit connected to the CONTROLLER 1 port on
the transceiver unit has priority and it controls the power for both the No.1 and No. 2 control
units. The power switch of the No. 2 control unit powers on/off the No. 2 control unit only.
Note: Turn on power at switchboard more than five minutes before turning on this
equipment.
1.3
Radiotelephone (RT) Screen
Turn the power on, or press the 1/ RT/CH key to show the radiotelephone screen. This is
where you set up the transceiver unit, and communicate by voice or telex.
DR
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SEN
IA
S
10.0A
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
POS 35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
Radiotelephone (RT) screen
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Indication
Meaning
CH
Tx
Channel
TX frequency (Tx: while transmitting)
Rx
RX frequency
Blinks when there are messages not read yet.
DR/DS
DR: Distress received, DS: Distress sent
Speaker on/off
SSB/TLX/AM
Class of Emission
SIMP/SDUP/DUP
Communication mode (SIMP: simplex, SDUP: semi-duplex,
DUP: full-duplex
HIGH/MID/LOW1/LOW2 Output power (LOW2: FS-5070 only, minimum output power)
FAST/SLOW/OFF
(AGC)
Auto gain control (FAST: high-speed, SLOW: low-speed, OFF: no
adjustment)
NB
Noise blanker
SQ
Squelch
SEN
Receiving sensitivity
S
S-meter, displays the strength of received signal.
Transceiver unit status (IA: antenna current, IC: collector current, VC:
collector voltage, RF: PA output)
Own ship’s ID (nine digits)
IA/IC/VC/RF
MMSI
POS
Own ship’s position
EPFS/MAN
Own ship’s position data source
EPFS: GPS navigator
MAN: manual (See section 6.6.)
1.4
DSC Standby Screen
The DSC standby screen may be displayed by pressing the 6/SCAN key. This screen scans
and receives the distress and routine frequencies, and sends the acknowledgement for the
received message automatically.
Acknowledge status
(AUTO ACK or MANUAL ACK)
Shown with nine digits.
AUTO ACK
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
6312.0
WATCH KEEPING
DISTRESS WR1
2187.5
4207.5
Maximum six distress and routine
frequencies scanned in clockwise
direction, and frequency currently
being scanned is highlighted.
One cycle is completed in less than
two seconds.
16804.5
ROUTINE TRX
2177.0
12577.0
8414.5
6331.0
8436.5
4219.5
12657.0
16903.0
35°00.0000N
135°00.0000E
UTC 00:00
MAN 23:59
Position and time. "EPFS" shown
when these are input automatically.
TRX: transceiver unit
WR2: The optional antenna for the routine frequency
DSC standby screen
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5
Control Unit Dimmer, Contrast
You can adjust the dimmer and contrast of the control unit.
1. Press the 9/
key to show the dimmer/contrast adjustment window.
DIMMER
(1~8)
6
CONTRAST
(40~63)
45
EXIT:[CANCEL]
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DIMMER or CONTRAST, whichever you want to
adjust, and then push the ENTER knob.
CONTRAST (40-63)
DIMMER (1-8)
55
6
Dimmer adjustment window Contrast adjustment window
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust and then push the ENTER knob.
4. To quit, push the CANCEL key.
1.6
Loudspeaker
The alarm beeps (other than distress communication) can be turned on or off.
1. Press the 7/ key to alternately disable or enable the loudspeaker and the alarm
generated for routine messages. SPEAKER ON or SPEAKER OFF appears with each
press.
2. Rotate the PWR/VOL knob to adjust volume of loudspeaker (cw: volume up, ccw:
volume down).
1.7
Setting Scan Frequencies
The DSC screen scans multiple routine frequencies according to operator-set interval. For
how to set frequency to scan, see section 6.13.
Note that voice and telex communication are not available when scanning. (However, they
are available when the system is equipped with the optional watch receiver.)
1. Press the 6/SCAN key to show the DSC screen. Scanning starts.
2. Press the 6/SCAN key again when the desired frequency is chosen to stop the cursor.
You can scan only the frequency chosen by cursor.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to move the cursor.
4. Press the 6/SCAN key to restart the scanning.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.8
Setting for Auto Acknowledgement
Individual, position, polling and test calls can be acknowledged automatically or manually.
Press the 5/ACK/SQ key to switch the acknowledge mode between automatic and manual
alternately. The message AUTO ACK or MANUAL ACK appears on the DSC standby screen
with each press of the key.
Note: When own ship’s communication is high priority, set to MANUAL ACK.
The auto acknowledgement is not sent in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
The category of a received message is DISTRESS, URGENCY or SAFETY.
The communication mode is NBDP-FEC, NBDP-ARQ or DATA.
Com Freq is NO INFO.
ECC is NG (No Good).
The handset is off hook.
1.9
System Characteristics
1.9.1
Equipment priority
Equipment priority order is as below.
1. Control unit sending distress alert
2. Control unit 1 – routine use
3. Control unit 2 – routine use
4. NBDP
1.9.2
Controls become inoperative
Controls become inoperative in the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
When the other control unit goes OFF HOOK on RT mode in the two control units system.
When the other control unit switches to the DSC mode in the two controls system.
NBDP is scanning or communicating.
Distress alert or distress relay is transmitted.
Call other than distress is transmitted (transmission time about 8 sec.) If it becomes
necessary to unlock the keyboard before the message is transmitted, press the CANCEL
key to cancel the call.
1.9.3
Controls become operative
Controls become operative in the following conditions:
•
•
DISTRESS button is pressed.
Control unit having higher priority is operated.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
•
•
The other control unit in two controls unit system goes ON HOOK.
NBDP stops scanning or communicating.
1.9.4
Automatic setting of working frequency
The radiotelephone automatically sets working frequency in the following conditions:
•
•
•
ABLE ACK is sent in response to individual call.
Your ship receives ABLE ACK in response to own ship-initiated individual call.
*Your ship receives ABLE ACK with COM. Frequency automatically changes in response to
own ship-initiated individual call.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Your ship sends geographical area call.
Your ship sends distress relay.
Your ship sends distress alert.
*Your ship receives group call.
*Your ship receives geographic area call.
*Your ship receives distress alert.
*: When receiving a call with different frequency from the setting, the following window
appears.
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down xx sec. Pause
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down has been paused.
Choose "Pause".
After 10 seconds passed or when "Agree" is chosen,
the working frequency is changed with the message
shown below.
Choose "Agree".
Accept New
Working Freq
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
1.10 Intercom
The built-in intercom permits voice communications between two control units.
1. Off hook the handset at the radiotelephone screen.
2. Press the IntCom key to show INTERCOM on the display. The called party’s control unit
rings.
3. When the called party picks up their handset, start communications.
4. Hang up the handset to turn the intercom off. The indication INTERCOM disappears
from the screen.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
You can use the SSB communication in the RT (radiotelephone) mode. Press the RT/CH
key to show the RT screen.
2.1
Choosing Class of Emission
There are three emission modes, SSB, TLX and AM.
•SSB: Single Sideband
•TLX: Telex (see chapter 7 to 10.)
•AM: AM (You cannot transmit in the AM mode.)
At the radiotelephone screen, choose class of emission as follows:
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to highlight the emission mode (default: SSB) and then push the
ENTER knob. When rotating the ENTER knob clockwise, the cursor moves from “CH” to
downward.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
Emission mode
SP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SSB
AGC mode
S
S
TLX
10.0A
AM
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose mode desired and then push the ENTER knob.
AGC is automatically selected according to emission mode.
• SSB : AGC FAST
•TLX: AGC OFF
•AM: AGC SLOW
3. However, you may change it as below.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose AGC mode and then push the ENTER knob.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH B SQ
OFF
SEN
IA
SLOW
10.0
FAST
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose OFF, SLOW or FAST as appropriate and then push the
ENTER knob.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
2.2
Choosing Channel, Frequency
Choose the channel or transmitting frequency to use for the SSB. This setting can be done
both when the handset is on and off hook.
Note: To set the SSB radiotelephone to 2182 kHz/J3E, press the RT/CH key more than five
seconds.
Choosing channel
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose CH and then push the ENTER knob.
You can show the channel window by pushing also 1/CH key.
CH:
200
Tx: 21Hz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SEN
IA
S
10.0A
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
2. Channel can be entered directly with the numeric keys, or by using the ENTER knob.
See below for details.
Entering band and band channel with the numeric keys: Use the numeric keys to
enter band and band channel and then push the ENTER knob.
Choosing band and band channel with the ENTER knob:
After showing the window, use the FILE/CURSOR key to place the cursor in the band or
band channel position, whichever you want to change.
200
200
Cursor position for
selection of band channel
Cursor position for
selection of band
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to set band (or channel) desired.
12 16 18 22 25 01 02----- 029
2
4
6
8
ITU band
User band
Setting Range
ITU Band:
User Band:
2/4/6/8/12/16/18/22/25
001-029 (First zero is necessary)
ITU Channel: XX01 - XX236 (rendering on band or mode)
User Channel: XXX01 - XXX99
4. Push the ENTER knob. The Tx and Rx frequencies of the channel entered appear.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
Choosing frequency
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose Tx or Rx as appropriate and then push the ENTER
knob.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx:2182.00kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SEN
IA
S
10.0A
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
35 00.0000N
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
135 00.0000E
2. Enter frequency by one of the methods below.
Entering frequency with the numeric keys:
Use the numeric keys to enter frequency and then push the ENTER knob. For example,
to enter 2161 kHz, key in 2, 1, 6, 1, 0. (Keying in 2-1-6-1 will set 216.1 kHz.) Be sure to
include zero for 100 Hz place.
Choosing frequency with the ENTER knob (for RX only):
3. Use the FILE/CURSOR key to choose digit to change.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to set digit.
5. Push the ENTER knob.
Note: When Tx and Rx frequencies are different, enter Tx and Rx in that order:
Tx: Tx/Rx frequencies
Rx: Rx frequency only
2.3
Transmitting
After selecting class of emission and frequency, you can transmit by pressing the PTT
switch. Tx is shown on the display.
2.3.1
Transmitting procedure
Maximum transmission power is achieved only when the antenna impedance and
transmitter impedance match each other. Because the antenna impedance changes with
frequency, antenna impedance matching with the transmitter impedance is done with the
antenna coupler. The antenna coupler automatically tunes the transmitter to a wide range of
different antenna lengths, from 7 to 18 (FS-1570/2570) or 10 to 18 (FS-5070) meters.
To initiate the automatic tuning, do the following:
1. Press the PTT switch on the handset or the LOG/TUNE key more than one second on
the control unit. Tuning is automatically adjusted at first transmission after frequency is
changed. “TUNING” appears when the LOG/TUNE key is pressed more than one
second; “Tx” pops out when the PTT switch is pressed.
Tuning will be completed within 2 to 5 seconds for a newly selected frequency, or less
than 0.5 seconds for a once-tuned frequency. When the tuning process is successfully
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
completed, TUNE: OK appears. If tuning fails, TUNE: NG appears.
2. Hold the handset close to your mouth, press the PTT switch and speak clearly.
Note:When tuning is initiated in the two control units system, the display of the idle control
unit shows “OCCUPIED(ANOTHER CONTROLLER).” In this case, only the
DISTRESS button is operative on the idle control unit. Further, if a control unit is in
use when the other control is tuned, the display of the activated control unit shows
“OCCUPIED” plus the reason why cannot use: ANOTHER CONTROLLER or NBDP
to inform you that tuning is not operated.
2.3.2
Reducing transmitter power
To minimize possible interference to other stations, reduce the transmission power. This
should be done when using the transceiver in a harbor, near the shore or close to
communication partner (other ship).
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose HIGH, MID, LOW (1) or LOW2 (shown on FS-5070)
in the equipment states area and then push the ENTER knob.
CH:
200
FS-1570 FS-2570 FS-5070
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
HIGH 150Wpep 250Wpep 500Wpep
100Wpep 125Wpep 350Wpep
68Wpep 90Wpep 200Wpep
MID
SSB SIMP FAST NB SQ
HIGH
MID
LOW1
LOW1*
SEN
IA
S
A
LOW2
110Wpep
MMSI xxxxxxLOW2
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000
*: For FS-1570/2570, "LOW"
(Power: ITU401CH)
135 00.0000E
(The above figure shows FS-5070.)
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose a power as appropriate and then push the ENTER
knob.
Note:Power amplifier temperature is monitored, and when its temperature rises above a
certain temperature output power is automatically reduced. For FS-5070, when the
over current is detected, output power is automatically reduced.
2.3.3
Condition of the transmitting unit
While transmitting, you may display RF (PA output), IA (antenna current), IC (collector
current) or VC (collector voltage), at the lower left-hand side of the radiotelephone screen.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose RF, IA, IC or VC (whichever is displayed) in the
equipment states area, and push the ENTER knob.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
IA
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
IC
SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
VC
S
Equipment states area
RF
10.0A
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose option desired and then push the ENTER knob.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
Checking the transmitting power
During transmission, the IA bar deflects according to the current being fed to the antenna
feeder from the antenna coupler. The unit of readout is amperes. The antenna current
varies with the effective antenna impedance. The reading differs by the frequency and
antenna length. The output power is proportional to the square of an antenna current.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SEN
IA
S
2.1A
Antenna Current
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
2.4
Receiving
Check if the emission mode and receiving frequency are set properly. If necessary, set them
again referring to section 2.1 and 2.2.
2.4.1
RF gain (sensitivity) adjustment
In normal use the sensitivity should be set for maximum. If the audio on the received
channel is unclear or interfered with other signals, adjust (usually reduce) sensitivity to
improve clarity.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SEN in the equipment states area and then push the
ENTER knob.
SEN
2. Rotate the ENTER to adjust and then push the ENTER knob.
2.4.2
S-meter
The S-meter shows relative signal strength coming into the receiver front end. Note that the
S-meter does not function when the AGC is turned off.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
Equipment states area
SEN
IA
S
S-meter
10.0A
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
2.4.3
Receiving AM broadcasting stations
1. Press the RT key to show the radiotelephone screen.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose emission mode and then push the ENTER knob.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
Emission mode
SP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SSB
AGC mode
S
S
TLX
10.0A
AM
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
35 00.0000N
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
135 00.0000E
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose AM and then push the ENTER knob.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose Rx and then push the ENTER knob.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx:2182.00kHz
SSB SIMP HIGH FAST NB SQ
SEN
IA
S
10.0A
MMSI xxxxxxxxx
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
POS
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
5. Key in RX frequency with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob.
2.4.4
Squelch function
Squelch on/off
The squelch mutes the audio output in the absence of an incoming signal. Press the
ACK/SQ key to turn on and off the squelch alternately. When radio noise is too jarring
during stand-by condition, it may be muted by activating the squelch. “SQ” in the equipment
states area is hatched when the squelch function is active.
Squelch frequency
To adjust the squelch frequency, see section 6.3.
2.4.5
Noise blanker
The noise blanker functions to remove pulse noise. To turn it on or off, see section 6.2.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
2.5
When Automatic Tuning Fails
The antenna coupler automatically tunes a wire or whip antenna transceiver. When all
frequencies cannot be tuned, TUNE: OK will not appear on the display. In this case, you can
tune 2182 kHz by manually operating the coupler as shown below.
DANGER
HIGH TENSION HAZARD
DO NOT TRANSMIT WHEN
THE ANTENNA COUPLER
IS OPEN.
1. Turn off the control unit. Remove the cover of the antenna coupler.
2. Set the MANUAL-AUTO switch to the MANUAL position.
COUPLER BOARD
MANUAL
AUTO
3. Replace the cover.
4. Turn on the control unit.
5. Communicate using 2182 kHz.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
2.6
User Channels
The USER CH menu provides for registration of user TX and RX channels, where permitted
by the Authorities. The user channel in the System setup menu must be enabled in order to
register user channels. For further details, contact your dealer. See section 6.4 to register.
NOTICE
FURUNO will assume no responsibility
for the disturbance caused by the
unlawful or improper setting of user
channels.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. DSC OVERVIEW
3.1
What is DSC?
DSC is an acronym meaning Digital Selective Calling. It is a digital distress and general
calling system in the MF and HF bands used by ships for transmitting distress alerts and
general calls and by coast stations for transmitting the associated acknowledgements.
For DSC distress and safety calling in the MF and HF bands, the frequencies are 2187.5,
4207.5, 6312.0, 8414.5, 12577.0, and 16804.5 kHz.
The DSC station sends and receives DSC general and distress calls via the radiotelephone.
requency
Distress F
Routine DSC Call
Routine DSC Calls
TRANSCEIVER
UNIT
Option
CONTROL UNIT
3.2
DSC Message
DSC calls are roughly divided in two groups: distress, urgency and safety messages, and
routine messages. Below are the types of DSC messages.
Call
Description
Your ship sends distress message
Distress Alerts
Distress relay area
Distress relay coast
Medical Transport
Neutral Craft
Your ship relays distress call to all ships in a specific geographical area
Your ship relays distress call to a coast station
Inform areas that your ship is carrying medical supplies*
Inform areas that your ship is not a participant in armed conflict*
Call to a specific address
Individual
PSTN message
Test message
Group message
Area message
Position
Call over Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Send test signal to a station to test your station’s functionality
Call to a specific group
Call to all ships in a specific geographical area
Your ship requests position of other ships
Polling message
Confirm if own ship is within communicating range with other ships.
(Receive and answer only)
*Special Message: When sending these messages, set the acknowledgement. See section
6.15.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. DSC OVERVIEW
Contents of a DSC call
Calling category
Call category
Call
DISTRESS
GENERAL
Distress Alerts, Distress relay area, Distress relay coast
Individual, PSTN message, Test message, Group message, Area
message, Position, Medical Transport, Nautical Craft, Polling message
Station ID
Own ship ID and sending station ID. Coast station ID begins with 00; Group ID
begins with 0.
Priority
Distress:
Grave and imminent danger and request immediate assistance.
Urgency:
A calling station has a very urgent call to transmit concerning safety of
ship, aircraft or other vehicle or safety of person.
Safety:
A station is about to transmit a call containing an important
navigational or meteorological warning.
Routine:
General calling
Communication type
Telephone: Telephone (J3E) by SSB radiotelephone
NBDP-ARQ: Telex (J2B) mode ARQ via NBDP Terminal Unit
NBDP-FEC: Telex (J2B) mode FEC via NBDP Terminal Unit
DATA:
Data communication by SSB (Routine individual only)
Communication frequency
Working frequency used to call by telephone, NBDP or DATA. The sending station may
have the receiving frequency (ship or coast station) assign the frequency to use.
Position
Position can be automatically or manually sent.
DSC frequency
DSC frequency to use. If the call priority is SAFETY, URGENCY and DISTRESS,
choose a DSC distress frequency.
End code
The end of a DSC call is denoted by RQ (Acknowledgement required), BQ
(Acknowledgement) or EOS (no acknowledgement required).
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. DSC OVERVIEW
3.3
Audio Alarms
When you receive a distress alert or routine call addressed to your ship, the audio and
visual alarms are released. For the distress or urgency call, the audio alarm sounds until
the CANCEL key is pressed, and sounds for one minute and then automatically goes off
in case of other calls. The tone of the alarm changes with the call received. By becoming
accustomed to the tone, you can know which type of call you or other party have received.
Alarm
Frequency (interval)
150 Hz (1000 ms) and 100 Hz (500 ms)
150 Hz (1000 ms) and 100 Hz (500 ms)
2000 Hz and 0 Hz (500 ms)
Safety call received
Routine call received
While DISTRESS button is pressed for four s
Distress alert sent
2200 Hz, continuous (2 seconds)
2000 Hz (250 ms) and 0 Hz (500 ms)
2200 Hz and 1300 Hz (250 ms)
2200 Hz and 1300 Hz (250 ms)
2200 Hz and 1300 Hz (250 ms)
2200 Hz (500 ms) and 1300 Hz (500 ms)
2200 Hz and 0 Hz (250 ms)
Own ship position not updated
Distress alert call received
Distress relay call received
Distress relay ack call received
Distress ack call received
Urgency call received
Urgency ack call received
2200 Hz and 0 Hz (500 ms)
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. DSC OVERVIEW
3.4
Interpreting Call Displays
This paragraph provides the information necessary for interpreting receive and send call
displays.
3.4.1
Receive calls
Below are sample distress and individual receive calls. The content of other types of
receive calls is similar to that of the individual call.
Distress receive call
Date and time of message
Received message
*
*
MAR-11-2006-23:59
Call type
DISTRESS ALERT
SHIP ID IN DIST:
ID No. of ship in distress
123456789
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
Nature of Distress (Undesignated, Fire, Flooding,
Collision, Grounding, Listing, Sinking, Disabled,
Abandoning, Piracy, Man Overboard)
12°34.5678N DIST: 5546nm
123°45.6789E AT 12:34
POS:
TELEPHONE 2182.0 kHz 10M10S
Position of ship in distress
ANSWER
GO TO VIEW
Working frequency to use and communication type
Push ENTER knob
to switch.
View message
DISTRESS COORDINATES:
12°34.5678N
Distress coordinates (position of ship in distress)
123°45.5678E
AT 12:34
Telecommand (class of emission)
Acknowledge type
COMMUNICATION MODE: TELEPHONE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
ERROR-CHECK: OK
Error check (OK or NG)
DSC FREQ
: 2187.5KHZ
DSC frequency used to transmit distress call
PREV
BACK TO RECEIVED VIEW
Rotate ENTER knob
to switch.
View message
*
Format (distress)
ID No. of ship in distress
DISTRESS ALERT
SENDER-ID
: 123456789
NATURE OF DISTRESS:
UNDESIGNATED DISTRESS
Nature of distress
(problem with ship in distress, see above)
ꢀ
NEXT
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. DSC OVERVIEW
Individual receive call
Date and time of message
Received message
*
*
Message type (or the reason when
MAR-11-2006-23:59
the message is not received)
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
SENDER ID: 123456789
ID No. of sending station
PRIORITY: ROUTINE TX: 2222.2 kHz
RX: 2222.2 kHz
Priority (Routine, Safety, Urgency)
Working frequency to use
Communication type
TELEPHONE
10M10S
ANSWER
GO TO VIEW
Note: ANSWER is for replying to message.
Push ENTER knob
to switch.
View message
COMM FREQUENCY
TX: 2222.2 kHz
RX: 2222.2 kHz
Working frequency to use
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
ERROR-CHECK: OK
Error check (OK or NG)
DSC frequency used
DSC FREQUENCY TX: 2177.0KHZ
RX: 2177.0KHZ
PREV
BACK TO RECEIVED VIEW
Rotate ENTER knob to switch.
View message
Format (individual)
ID No. of your station
Priority (Routine, Safety, Urgency)
ID No. of sending station
Communication type
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
DESTINATION ID
PRIORITY
: 111111111
: ROUTINE
: 123456789
SENDER-ID
COMMUNICATION MODE: TELEPHONE
COMM OPTION
:
NO INFORMATION
Communication option
NEXT
3.4.2
Send calls
Below are sample distress and individual send calls. The content of other types of send
calls is similar to that of the individual call.
Distress send call
Distress button
pressed!
Nature of Distress (Undesignated, Fire, Flooding,
Collision, Grounding, Listing, Sinking, Disabled,
Abandoning, Piracy, Man Overboard)
Position of ship in distress (your ship)
Working frequency to use and communication type
DSC frequency to send distress call
Seconds to continue pressing the DISTRESS button
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12°34.0000N
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
KEEP PRESSED FOR
2182.0 kHz
:
2187.5 kHz
2S
to transmit the distress alert.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. DSC OVERVIEW
Individual send call
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE:
INDIVIDUAL
Message type (Individual)
STATION ID:
PRIORITY
COMM. MODE : TELEPHONE
COMM. FREQ : 2078.0kHz
123456789
: ROUTINE
ID No. of station where message is to be sent
Priority (Routine, Safety, Urgency)
Mode of communication (Telephone, NBDP-ARQ, NBDP-FEC, Data)
Working frequency
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
DSC frequency
GO TO VIEW
Push ENTER knob to switch.
View message
COMM FREQUENCY TX: 2222.2 kHz
RX: 2222.2kHz
Working frequency
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
Acknowledge type
DSC frequency used
DSC FREQUENCY TX: 2177.0 KHZ
RX: 2177.0 KHZ
PREV
BACK TO COMPOSE VIEW
Rotate ENTER knob to switch.
View message
Message type
ID No. of station where message is to be sent
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
DESTINATION ID
PRIORITY
SELF-IDENTITY
:
123456789
: ROUTINE
: 111111111
Priority
ID No. of your station
COMMUNICATION MODE: TELEPHONE
Communication mode
COMM OPTION
: NO INFORMATION
NEXT
Communication option
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
Distress operation overview
1. Press the DISTRESS button.
2. Wait for the distress alert acknowledgement.
3. Communicate with the coast station.
(1)
(2)
Own Ship
(3)
(1)
Coast
Station
(2)
(3)
Ship in
Distress
(Own Ship)
(1) Ship in distress sends Distress Alert
(2) Coast station sends distress acknowledgement (DIST ACK).
(3) Voice or telex communications between ship in distress and coast station
For details, see below.
4.1
Sending Distress Alert
GMDSS ships carry a DSC terminal with which to transmit the distress alert in the event of a
life-endangering situation. A coast station receives the distress alert and sends the distress
alert acknowledge call to the ship in distress. Then, voice or telex communications between
the ship in distress and coast station begins. Transmission of the distress alert and
receiving of the distress alert acknowledgement are completely automatic – simply press
the DISTRESS button to initiate the sequence. Note that the distress can also be
transmitted from the Distress Alert Unit IC-302.
There are four types of sending distress alert; MULTI, AUTO, SELECT and 2-16MHz.
MULTI is used normally. When changing to other method, see step 15 on paragraph 4.1.2.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
4.1.1
Sending distress alert by DISTRESS button, nature of
distress not specified
1. Open the DISTRESS button cover and press and hold down the DISTRESS button more
than four seconds. The button flashes in red and the buzzer sounds rapidly. The display
shows the contents of the distress alert call: your ship’s nature of distress, position, time
and the DSC frequency over which the alert has been transmitted.
The number of seconds to continue pressing the DISTRESS button appear at the
bottom of the display. The buzzer sounds continuously and the lamp in the button lights
when the button has been pressed four seconds. You can release the button at that
time.
Distress button
pressed!
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
Nature of Distress
Position, Time
POS: 12°34.0000 N
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
2182.0 kHz
2187.5kHz
DSC Frequency
used to transmit the
distress alert
KEEP PRESSED FOR 2S
Displays number of seconds to continue
pressing the DISTRESS button to
transmit the distress alert.
The display changes as below. It takes about 40 to 60 seconds to transmit the distress alert,
and the number of seconds until transmission is completed is shown at the bottom of the
display. At this time the output power
of the radiotelephone is
automatically set to maximum.
Distress alert
message in progress!
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12°34.0000N
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO :
2182.0 kHz
2187.5 kHz
38S
:
Time to go until distress
alert is completely transmitted.
After the distress alert has been sent, the display changes as below and the audio alarm is
stopped. Wait to receive the distress acknowledge call from a coast station, which usually
takes 1 to 2 min 45 seconds. (The DISTRESS button remains lit until the equipment receives
the distress acknowledge call from a coast station.) When waiting the distress acknowledge,
the timer counts down the number of minutes before next retransmission, from 3.5 to 4.5
minutes, randomly set.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
At this time, the equipment cannot receive any calls except the distress alert
acknowledge call. The distress alert you sent is recorded in the TX log.
Wait for distress
acknowledgement.
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12°34.0000N
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
2182.0 kHz
2187.5 kHz
TIME TO GO: 2M10S RESENDING
When the distress acknowledge call is received, the audio alarm sounds and the display
changes as below.
Distress acknowledge
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
SHIP IN DIST: 123456789
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
DIST: 0 nm
POS: 12°34.0000N
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
2182.0 kHz
TELEPHONE
Note:If you do not receive the distress alert acknowledge call, the
equipment automatically re-transmits the distress alert and then awaits
the distress alert acknowledge call. This is repeated until the distress
alert is acknowledged.
2. Silence the alarm with the CANCEL key when the distress acknowledge call is received.
The contents of the distress acknowledge call appear.
Received message
MAR-11-2006-23:59
DISTRESS ACKNOWLEDGE
SENDER ID: 001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12°34.0000N DIST : 5nm
123°45.0000E AT 12:34
Elapsed time after receiving
(Max. "60M00S"
For over 60 minutes, nothing appears. )
10M10S
TELEPHONE 2182.0 kHz
GO TO VIEW
3. Communicate with the coast station via radiotelephone, following the instructions below.
The radiotelephone automatically sets working frequency and class of emission, as
specified in the distress acknowledge call.
a) Say MAYDAY three times.
b) Say “This is … “ name of your vessel and call sign three times.
c) Give nature of distress and assistance needed.
d) Give description of your vessel (type, color, number of persons onboard, etc.).
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
4.1.2
Sending distress alert by DISTRESS button, nature of
distress specified
If you have the time to designate the nature of distress, send the distress alert as follows:
1. Open the DISTRESS button cover and press the DISTRESS button momentarily to
show the following display.
Rotate ENTER knob to scroll.
ꢀ
Compose msg.
MSG T
UNDESIGNATED
SINKING
FIRE
DISABLED
NATUR
FLOODING
COLLISION
ABANDONING
PIRACY
MAN OVERBOARD
POS.
GROUNDING
COMM
LISTING
DSC F
ꢀ
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose nature of distress and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the POS. menu. This is where you enter your position,
automatically or manually. The INPUT TYPE option, that is, the source of position data,
is selected to EPFS, MANUAL or NO INFO. For EPFS, if the position is correct, push
the ENTER knob twice and go to step 12. For manual input, or you do not know your
position, go to step 4.
INPUT TYPE: EPFS
LAT : 34° 41.1234 N
LON : 135° 30.1234 E
TIME: 09: 00 UTC
Note:If the message “No Position Data” appears when you change INPUT
TYPE from MANUAL to EPFS, confirm that the navigation device is
functioning and then choose EPFS again.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the INPUT TYPE menu.
INPUT TYPE: A
EPFS
LAT : 34° 41
MANUAL
LON : 135° 30
NO INFO
TIME: 09: 00 UTC
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MANUAL and then push the ENTER knob to go to
step 6. If you cannot confirm your position, choose NO INFO, push the ENTER knob
twice and then go to step 10.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the latitude input window.
7. Use the numeric keys to enter latitude (in eight digits). (If necessary, switch coordinates:
1 key to switch to North; 2 key to switch to South.) Push the ENTER knob.
INPUT TYPE: MANUAL
3
5
°
00.0000
N
LAT : 34° 4
3
00.0000 N
3
4
°
NORTH: [1] KEY
SOUTH: [2] KEY
LON : 135°
After last digit
is entered
TIME: 09: 0
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the longitude input window.
9. Use the numeric keys to enter longitude (in nine digits). (If necessary, switch
coordinates: 1 key to switch to East; 2 key to switch to West.) Push the ENTER knob.
INPUT TYPE: MANUAL
LAT : 35° 00 NORTH
LAT: 34 41 NORTH
LON : 135° 30 EAST
1
35
°00.0000 E
1
35
°30.0000 E
EAST: [1] KEY
WEST: [2] KEY
TIME: 09
After last digit
is entered
10. Push the ENTER knob to open the time input window.
INPUT TYPE: MANUAL
LAT : 35°00 NORTH
LAT : 34 41 NORTH
LON : 135° 00 EAST
LON
: 135˚ 30 EAST
TIME: 09C
12 : 34
11. Key in UTC time with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob.
Note:If you cannot confirm time, enter 88:88 to input NO INFO as the time.
12. The COMPOSE MESSAGE screen is redisplayed. Push the ENTER knob to open the
COMM MODE menu.
Compose msg.
DISTRESS
NATURE: FLOODING
TELEPHONE
MSG TYPE:
POS: 35°00.0
NBDP-FEC
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ : 2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
13. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TELEPHONE or NBDP-FEC as appropriate and then
push the ENTER knob. (Telephone is the usual mode, however NBDP may also be
used.)
14. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
** Compose message **
AUTO
* 2MHZ
* 4MHZ
* 6MHZ
* 8MHZ
*12MHZ
*16MHZ
EXIT
MULTI
MSG TYPE:
SELECT
NATURE: FLOS
2187.5
4207.5
POS: 35°00.00
6312.0
COMM MODE:
8414.5
12577.0
HZ
16804.5
GO TO ALL VIEW
DSC FREQ :
Each pressing of ENTER key
shows/hides asterisk (marked
for chosen frequencies).
15.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose a DSC frequency mode, and push the ENTER knob.
MULTI: Transmits the distress alert on 2MHz, 4 MHz, 6 MHz, 8MHz, 12 MHz and 16
MHz in that order in a transmission, then waits for acknowledgement.
AUTO: Transmits the distress alert on 2 MHz at first time (40 to 60 seconds). If the
distress alert is not acknowledged, the following sequence occurs:
2nd: 8 MHz, 3rd: 16 MHz, 4th: 4 MHz, 5th: 12 MHz and 6th: 6 MHz
SELECT: You can transmit on the distress frequencies of your choice. The minimum
number is three and 2 MHz and 8 MHz are mandatory; they cannot be deselected.
2187.5 to 16804.5: Transmits the distress alert on the frequency chosen five times.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
The display changes as below (example).
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
NATURE
: DISTRESS
: FLOODING
POS: 35°00.0000N
135°00.0000E
AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
2187.5 kHz
COMM MODE
:
DSC FREQ
:
GO TO VIEW
16.Press the DISTRESS button more than four seconds to send the distress alert.
Distress alert
message in progress!
NATURE: FLOODING
35°00.0000N
135°00.0000E
POS:
AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
2182.0 kHz
:
2187.5 kHz
TIME TO GO : 38S
17.When the distress acknowledge call is received, use the telephone or telex to
communicate.
For telephone, follow step 3 on page 4-3. For NBDP, follow the procedure below.
Communicating by NBDP Terminal Unit
The message “STATION ENTRY COMPLETED FROM DSC. Press any key to escape.”
Appears on the NBDP’s display.
1. Press any key on the NBDP Terminal Unit to erase the message.
2. Press the function key F3 on the keyboard of the NBDP Terminal Unit to show the
Operate menu.
3. Choose “Call Station” and then press the Enter key.
Call Station
Station Set up
Station : DSC
ID Code :
Station List
DSC
ABC-6M
ABC-12M
ABC-8M
FURUNO
Mode
: ARQ FEC
Tx Freq : 2174.50
Rx Freq : 2174.50
4. “DSC” is selected; press the Enter key to connect the communications line.
“Connect” appears in reverse video.
5. Type and transmit your message, giving the following information:
• Ship’s name and call sign
• Nature of distress and assistance needed
• Description of your vessel
6. Press the function key F10 (BREAK) to disconnect the line.
For NBDP details, see Chapters 7 through 10.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
4.2
Receiving a Distress Alert
When you receive a distress alert from a ship in distress, the audio alarm sounds and the
message “Distress alert message received.” Appears on the display. Press the CANCEL
key to silence the audio alarm. Wait for the distress acknowledge call from a coast station. If
you do not receive the distress acknowledge call from a coast station, which usually takes
about five minutes from the time of reception of a distress alert, follow the appropriate flow
chart in this section to determine your course of action.
Note 1: An asterisk (*) appearing in a distress alert message indicates error at
asterisk location.
Note 2: If the DISTRESS/URGENT RECEIVING UNIT IC-303 is connected, the
aural alarm sounds and the IC-303’s alarm lamp lights in red when a
distress alert is received. To silence the aural alarm, press the ALARM
RESET key.
4.2.1
Distress alert received on MF band
Do the following:
•
•
Continue watching on 2182 kHz. Wait for coast station to acknowledge the distress call.
Watch until “SEELONCE FINI” is announced.
If multiple DSC distress alerts are received from the same ship in distress and it is beyond a
doubt in your vicinity, a DSC acknowledgement may, after consultation with an RCC or
Coast Station, be sent to terminate the call by DSC.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
Action for ship receiving distress alert on MF band
DSC Distress alert received.
Press CANCEL key to
silence alarm.
Listen on 2182 kHz
for 5 minutes.
Did you receive
acknowledge from
CS and/or RCC?
Is the DSC
distress call
continuing?
No
Is distress traffic
in progress?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Is own
vessel able
to aid
Yes
Acknowledge the alert by
radiotelphony to the ship
in distress on 2182 kHz.
Yes
ship in
distress?
CS = Coast Station
RCC = Rescue Co-ordination Center
No
Enter details in log.
Inform CS and/or RCC.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
Sending the distress acknowledge call to ship in distress (on MF band)
Note: You cannot send the distress acknowledge call for five minutes because of receiving
the distress acknowledgement from the coast station.
Transmit the distress acknowledge call to the ship in distress only when you do not receive
it from a coast station and you are able to aid the ship in distress. First, transmit the
distress acknowledge to the ship in distress by telephone. To terminate transmission of the
distress alert, send acknowledge call as follows.
The audio alarm sounds and the display shows the message “Distress alert message
received.” When your ship receives a distress alert.
Distress alert
Distress alert
message received.
10 seconds
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PLEASE PUSH CANCEL KEY.
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
123°4500E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE 2182.0 kHz
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the audio alarm and the display changes as below.
Received message
*
*
JAN-23-2006-23:59
DISTRESS ALERT
State of Waiting
Press any key.
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
For Acknowledge.
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12 34.000N DIST: 43nm
123 45.000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE 2182.0 kHz 10M10S
PUSH ANY KEY.
GO TO VIEW
ANSWER
2. If you do not receive the distress acknowledge call from a coast station and you
have received the distress alert more than twice, contact the ship in distress over
radiotelephone.
3. If the distress alert continues, terminate the alert by rotating the ENTER knob to choose
ANSWER, push the ENTER knob and then go to step 4 to send the distress
acknowledge call to the ship in distress.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the MSG TYPE menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
RELAY COAST
RELAY AREA
COAS
ACKNOWLEDGE
SHIP I
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ACKNOWLEDGE and then push the ENTER knob.
The following display appears.
Compose msg.
Ack should be
By Coast Station
MSG TYPE
: DISTRESS ACK
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
SHIP ID IN DIST : 123456789
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
GO TO VIEW
6. Press the CALL key for three seconds.
The message “Priority distress transmit sure?” appears. Continue to press the key until
the message “Distress acknowledge message in progress.” Appears, to transmit the
distress acknowledge call to the ship in distress.
Distress acknowledge
message in progress!
Priority distress
transmit sure?
SHIP ID IN DIST : 123456789
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
CALL key
pressed
3 seconds
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 KHZ
DSC FREQ :
2187.5 KHZ
3S
KEEP PRESSED FOR
TIME TO GO: 4S
4.2.2
Distress alert received on HF band
If you receive a distress alert on the HF band, the ALARM lamp lights and the audio alarm
sounds. Press the CANCEL key to silence the audio alarm. Wait for the distress
acknowledge from a coast station. If you do not receive the distress acknowledge within five
minutes, follow the instructions below to determine your course of action.
•
•
Watch on the distress frequency.
Relay the distress alert in the following cases:
- You have not received a distress acknowledge call from a coast station within five
minutes after receiving a distress call.
- You have not received a distress relay from other ship.
- You cannot receive distress communications from other ship over radiotelephone.
- If it is clear the ship or persons in distress are not in the vicinity and/or other crafts
are better placed to assist, superfluous communications which could interfere with
search and rescue activities should be avoided. Details should be recorded in the
appropriate log book.
- The ship relaying the distress alert should establish communications with the station
controlling the distress as directed and render such assistance as required and
appropriate.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
When receiving a DSC message, the following message may appear.
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down xx sec. Pause
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down has been paused.
Choose "Pause".
After 10 seconds passed or when "Agree" is chosen,
the working frequency is changed with the message
shown below.
Choose "Agree".
Accept New
Working Freq
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
Action for ships receiving distress alert on HF band
DSC Distress alert received.
HF DSC, RTF AND NBDP CHANNELS (kHz)
DSC
RTF*
NBDP
Press CANCEL key to
silence alarm.
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
4125
6215
8291
12290
16420
4177.5
6268
8376.5
12520
16695
Listen to associated RTF or
NBDP channel(s) for 5 minutes.
* = Radiotelephone
Is distress commu-
nication in progress
on associated RTF
channels?
Transmit distress
relay on HF to CS
and inform RCC.
Is the alert
acknowledged or
relayed by CS and
or RCC?
No
No
Yes
Is own
vessel able
to assist?
Yes
Yes Contact RCC via most
efficient medium to offer
assistance.
No
CS = Coast Station
RCC = Rescue Co-ordination Center
Enter details in log.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
Sending the distress relay to coast station (on HF band)
The audio alarm sounds and the display changes as below when a distress call is received.
Distress alert
message received!
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS:
12 34.0000N DIST: 43nm
123 45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
8291.0 kHz
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the audio alarm, and the display changes as below.
Received message
*
*
JAN-23-2006-23:59
DISTRESS ALERT
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
12 34.0000N DIST: 43nm
123 45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE 8291.0 kHz 10M10S
POS:
GO TO VIEW
ANSWER
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ANSWER and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the MSG TYPE menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
COA
: INDVIDUAL
RELAY COAST
RELAY AREA
SHIP 21
DSC FREQ
:
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
4. If you know the ID of the nearest coast station, choose RELAY COAST and then push
the ENTER knob.
5. Push ENTER knob and key in ID of coast station where to send the distress relay and
then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : RELAY COAST
COAST ID
00*******
SHIP ID IN DIST:
DSC FREQ
8414.5 kHz
:
GO TO VIEW
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ. Menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE:
2187.5
COAST SH
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
COAST ID:
SHIP ID IN DI
12577.0
16804.5
DSC FREQ
KHZ
GO TO VIEW
7. Choose appropriate frequency and then push the ENTER knob. You should first choose
8414.5 kHz.
8. Press the CALL key, and the display changes as shown below.
Priority distress
transmit sure?
Distress relay coast
message in progress!
COAST ID: 001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
DESTINATION ID: 001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
CALL key
pressed 3
seconds.
DSC FREQ :
8414.5 kHz
3S
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO :
8414.5 kHz
KEEP PRESSED FOR
5S
Timer counts
down time until
the message is
transmitted.
(See note below.)
Wait for distress
relay acknowledge.
DESTINATION ID: 001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
DSC FREQ :
8414.5 kHz
TIME TO GO : 3M50S RESENDING
Note: If a coast station acknowledges the call before the timer counts down to zero, press
the CANCEL key to cancel the distress relay call.
After the call is transmitted, the message “Wait for distress relay acknowledge.” Appears.
After you have received the distress acknowledgement from the coast station, communicate
with the coast station by telephone, over the frequency specified. If you do not receive the
distress acknowledgement from a coast station after the timer counts down to zero, choose
RESEND and press the ENTER knob to transmit the distress relay again, over a different
frequency.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
4.3
Sending Distress Relay on Behalf of a Ship in
Distress
4.3.1
Sending distress relay to coast station
You may send the distress relay to a coast station on behalf of a ship in distress in the
following cases:
You are near the ship in distress and the ship in distress cannot transmit the distress alert.
When the master or person responsible for your ship considers that further assistance is
necessary.
Note: In the above cases, never use the DISTRESS button.
1. Press the DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose RELAY COAST and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the COAST ID window.
MANUAL
SELECT
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MANUAL or SELECT.
When you choose SELECT, a list of file names and ID numbers stored at MESSAGE
menu appears (For details, see Chapter 6.) In this case you can choose a file name with
ID number desired, and then push the ENTER knob and then go to step 6. When
choosing MANUAL, go to step 5.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: RELAY COAST
COAST ID
SHIP ID IN D
00*******
NATURE: UN
POS: NO INFORMATION
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ.
:
:
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
5. Key in COAST ID with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the SHIP ID IN DIST window.
Compose msg.
RELAY COAST
MSG TYPE:
: ---------
COAST ID:
SELECT
MANUAL
SHIP ID IN DIS
NATURE : UNDESIGNATED
: NO INFORMATION
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
POS.:
COMM MODE :
DSC FREQ :
7. Choose MANUAL or SELECT, and then push the ENTER knob. When you choose
SELECT, a list of file names and ID numbers stored at MESSAGE menu appears. Go to
step 9. When choosing MANUAL, you can choose a file name with ID number desired,
and go to step 8.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: RELAY COAST
COAST ID
SHIP ID IN D
NATURE: UN
POS: NO INFORMATION
*********
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ.
:
:
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
8. Key in ship’s ID in distress with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob. If you
do not know ID, press the CANCEL key.
9. Push the ENTER knob to open the NATURE menu.
Rotate ENTER knob to scroll.
Compose msg.
ꢀ
MSG M
UNDESIGNATED
COAST
FIRE
SINKING
DISABLED
ABANDONING
PIRACY
MAN OVERBOARD
SHIP I
FLOODING
COLLISION
NATUR
GROUNDING
POS: I
LISTING
COMM
ꢀ
DSC FREQ
10.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose nature of distress and then push the ENTER knob. If
you do not know the nature of distress, choose UNDESIGNATED.
11. Push the ENTER knob to open the POS. menu.
Compose msg
: ALL SHIPS
MSGLL TYPE
CO
INPUT TYPE: EPFS
LAT : 34°45.0000 N
SH
LON : 135°22.0000 E
NA
TIME: 10:00 UTC
PO
:
COM. TYPE
DSC FREQ
:
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
12.Enter position of ship in distress, following 1), 2) or 3) below.
1) For automatic input, push the ENTER knob and choose EPFS. Then push ENTER knob
and go to step 13.
2) For manual input, push the ENTER knob to open the INPUT TYPE menu, rotate the
ENTER knob to choose MANUAL and then push the ENTER knob. Enter latitude and
longitude of ship in distress and time as follows:
a)Push the ENTER knob. Enter latitude and then push the ENTER knob.
b)Push the ENTER knob. Enter longitude and then push the ENTER knob.
c) Push the ENTER knob. Enter UTC time and then push the ENTER knob. Go to step
13.
Note: If you cannot confirm time, enter 88:88 to input NO INFO as the time.
3) If you cannot confirm position of ship in distress, push the ENTER knob to open
the INPUT TYPE menu, rotate the ENTER knob to choose NO INFO and then push the
ENTER knob twice. Go to step 13.
13.Push the ENTER knob to open the COM. MODE menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: RELAY COAST
COAST ID: 001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST : 123456789
NATURE : UNDESIGNATED
TELEPHONE
POS: 34°45N 1
NBDP-FEC
COMM MODE
: 8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
DSC FREQ
14.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TELEPHONE and then push the ENTER knob.
(NBDP-FEC may also be used.)
15.Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE:
2187.5
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
COAST ID :
SHIP ID IN DI
NATURE: UN
POS COM.M
DSC FREQ
kHz
GO TO VIEW
16.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC (NBDP) frequency and then push
the ENTER knob. The display now looks something like the one below in case of
radiotelephone.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
: RELAY COAST
COAST ID
:
001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST: NO INFO
NATURE
POS
: SINKING
34 45.0000N
135
:
°
AT 10:00
°
22.0000E
:
COM. MODE
DSC FREQ
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
:
GO TO VIEW
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
17.Press the CALL key for three seconds, and the message “Priority distress transmit
sure?” appears. Continue pressing the key until the display shows “Distress relay coast
message in progress!” to send the distress relay call.
Priority distress
transmit sure?
Distress relay coast
message in progress!
COAST ID
:
001234567
DESTINATION ID:
001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST : NO INFO
:
SHIP ID IN DIST : NO INFO
NATURE
POS
: SINKING
: 34 45.0000 N
135 22.0000 E AT 10:00
CALL key
pressed 3
seconds
°
°
COMM MODE : TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ 8414.5 KHZ
KEEP PRESSED FOR
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO
:
8414.5 kHz
8S
:
:
3S
The equipment then waits for acknowledgement of the distress relay, displaying the
message shown below. If the distress relay is not acknowledged within five minutes, the
message “No response! Try calling again?” appears. If this occurs, send the distress relay
again.
Wait for distress
relay acknowledge.
DESTINATION ID : 001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST: NO INFO
:
DSC FREQ
8414.5 kHz
TIME TO GO : 4M59S RESENDING
When you receive the distress relay acknowledge message, the audio alarm sounds
and the display shown below appears.
Distress relay ack
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
NATURE
POS
: SINKING
: 12°34.0000 N DIST: 5nm
123°45.0000 E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
8291.0 kHz
18.Press the CANCEL key to silence the audio alarm.
Received message
MAY-23-2006-23:59
DISTRESS RELAY ACK
SENDER ID :
001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST : NO INFO
NATURE
POS
: SINKING
: 12°34.0000 N DIST: 5nm
123°45.0000 E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE 8291.0 kHz 10M10S
GO TO VIEW
19.Communicate with the coast station.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
4.3.2
Sending distress relay to area ships
Use this procedure to send the distress relay to area ships.
1. Press the DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose RELAY AREA and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the AREA menu.
4. You can choose QUAD or CIRCLE to set the area. The geographical area call is for
sending a call to all ships within the area you designate in your geographical area call. In
the figure below, for example, the call will be sent to all ships within 24-34°N, 135-140°W
(QUAD) and 34°N, 140°W, range: 5 NM (CIRCLE).
AREA line display
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: RELAY AREA
QUAD
"34 N 140
CIRCLE
AREA: **
**
°
°
W 10
°
5°"
QUAD
SHIP ID IN DIST : 123456789
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
CIRCLE
"34
°
00N 140 00W 0500NM"
°
POS: 34
135
°
45.0000 N
°
45.0000 E AT 9:30
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ.
:
:
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
Reference point
(For example,
34°N 140°W)
34°N
10°
500NM
Reference point
(For example,
34°N 140°W)
24°N
5°
140°W
135°W
QUAD
CIRCLE
5. Push the ENTER knob to open the SHIP ID IN DIST menu.
6. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MANUAL or SELECT. For MANUAL, key in ID of ship
in distress (if known) with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob. (If you do
not know the ID, press the CANCEL key.)
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NATURE :
N
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
7. Push the ENTER knob to open the NATURE menu.
Compose msg.
ꢀ
MSG M
UNDESIGNATED
SINKING
AREA:
FIRE
DISABLED
ABANDONING
PIRACY
FLOODING
SHIP ID
COLLISION
NATUR
GROUNDING
POS: I
MAN OVERBOARD
COMM
LISTING
ꢀ
DSC F
8. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose nature of distress and then push the ENTER knob. (If
you do not know the nature of distress, choose UNDESIGNATED.)
9. Push the ENTER knob to open the POS. menu, where you enter the position of the ship
in distress and time, manually or automatically.
Compose msg.
: ALL SHIPS
CALL TYPE
INPUT TYPE: EPFS
A
LAT : 34°45.1234 N
SH
LON : 135°45.1234 E
NA
TIME: 09:30 UTC
PO
COM. TYPE
DSC FREQ
:
:
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
10.Enter position of the ship in distress, following 1), 2) or 3) below.
1) For automatic input, push the ENTER knob and choose EPFS. Then push the ENTER
knob and go to step 10.
2) For manual input, push the ENTER knob to open the INPUT TYPE menu, rotate the
ENTER knob to choose MANUAL and then push the ENTER knob. Enter latitude and
longitude of ship in distress and time as follows:
a) Push the ENTER knob. Enter latitude and then push the ENTER knob.
b) Push the ENTER knob. Enter longitude and then push the ENTER knob.
c) Push the ENTER knob. Enter UTC time and then push the ENTER knob. Go to
step 10.
Note: If you cannot confirm time, enter 88:88 to input NO INFO as the time.
3) If you cannot confirm position of ship in distress, push the ENTER knob to open
the INPUT TYPE menu, rotate the ENTER knob to choose NO INFO and then push the
ENTER knob twice. Go to step 10.
11. Push the ENTER knob to open the COM. MODE menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: RELAY AREA
AREA: 44 N 125 E 17
21
SHIP ID IN DIS
TELEPHONE
POS: 34 45.00N
NBDP-FEC
: TELEPHONE
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ
:
8414.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
12.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TELEPHONE (or NBDP-FEC) and then push the
ENTER knob.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
13.Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Compose msg
MSG TYPE: R
2187.5
AREA:
4207.5
SHIP ID IN DI89
6312.0
NATURE: UN
POS: 34°45N
COMM MODE
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
DSC FREQ
KHZ
GO TO VIEW
14.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate frequency and then push the ENTER
knob. The display now looks something like the one below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: RELAY AREA
AREA: 44 N 125 E 17 21
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 34 45.0000N
135 45.0000E
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ
AT 09:30
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
:
:
GO TO VIEW
15.Press the CALL key for three seconds, and the message “Priority distress transmit
sure?” appears. Continue pressing the key until the display shows “Distress relay area
message in progress!” to send the distress relay call.
Distress relay area
Priority distress
messageinprogress! *
*
transmit sure?
AREA:
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 34 45.0000N
SHIP ID IN DIST: 123456789
CALL key
pressed
3 seconds
135 45.0000E AT 09:30
COMM MODE
DSC FREQ :
:
TELEPHONE
8414.5 kHz
3S
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
8414.5 kHz
8S
KEEP PRESSED FOR
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
4.4
Receiving Distress Relay from Coast Station
Your ship receives the distress relay when:
•
•
the coast station sends the distress relay to your ship. (DISTRESS RELAY COAST)
the coast station sends the distress relay to the area where you are navigating.
When you receive a distress relay message from a coast station, continue monitoring
distress and safety frequencies. The audio alarm sounds and the display looks like the one
in the left-hand figure below when a distress relay is received from a coast station.
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the audio alarm, and the display changes as in the
right-hand figure below.
Received message
MAY-23-2006-23:59
Distress relay coast
message received.
Press the
CANCEL key.
DISTRESS RELAY COAST
SENDER ID:
001234567
SHIP ID IN DIST:
123456789
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
NATURE: UNDESIGNATED
POS: 12
°
34.000N
DIST: 14nm
POS: 12
°
34.0000N
45.0000E
DIST: 14nm
AT 12:34
123
°
45.0000E AT 12:34
8291.5 kHz
123
°
TELEPHONE
TELEPHONE 8291.5 kHz 10M10S
GO TO VIEW
2. Press the CANCEL key to go to the radiotelephone screen.
3. Watch distress/safety frequency.
4.5
Cancelling Distress Call
You can cancel the distress call while it is being sent or while waiting for its
acknowledgement as follows.
1. Press the CANCEL key to show the following display.
The following message appears.
Distress Proc. is
Paused.
RESUME RESEND CANCEL
123 45.6789E
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO :
:
2187.5 kHz
0S
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. DISTRESS OPERATIONS
2. Choose CANCEL and push the ENTER knob to cancel the distress call.
Warning:
Distress Cancel Step
YES
NO
123 45.6789E
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO :
:
2187.5 kHz
0S
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and then push the ENTER knob to show the
following screen. The screen shows the used frequencies to send.
Distress Cancellation Proc.
Select frequency
and push ENTER.
P
Cancel: Back to pause menu.
123 45.6789E
2M-2187.5 kHz
4M-4207.5kHz
6M-6312.0kHz
8M-8414.5kHz
12M-12577.0kHz
16M-16804.5kHz
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the frequency which was used to send, and then
press the ENTER knob.
The cancellation message is transmitted over the same frequency used to transmit the
distress call.
Now Transmitting Distress
Cancellation Message
123 45.6789E
2M-2187.5 kHz
4M-4207.5kHz
6M-6312.0kHz
8M-8414.5kHz
12M-12577.0kHz
16M-16804.5kHz
5. When the following screen appears, communicate with all ships via radio telephone.
Send cancel msg. by voice
on 2182.0 kHz.
Push any key: Go next step.
123 45.6789E
*2M-2187.5 kHz
4M-4207.5kHz
6M-6312.0kHz
8M-8414.5kHz
12M-12577.0kHz
16M-16804.5kHz
Asterisk marks the frequency over which
the cancellation call was transmitted..
6. Press any key.
If you used other frequencies to send the distress call, the Distress Cancel sending
starts over the next frequency to yourself. In this case, repeat step 3.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to cancel for all frequencies.
When all cancellation is completed, the RT display appears.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING,
RECEIVING
Operation overview
The following shows about the individual message as example of the routine message. The
individual call is for sending a call to a specific station.
1. Send the individual message.
2. Wait for the individual message acknowledgement.
3. Start the communication.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) DSC Message [Called Acknowledge
Request (ACK RQ) Signal]
Coast
Station
(2) Acknowledge Back (ACK BQ) Signal
(3) Voice or telex communication
Own Ship
5.1
Individual Call
The individual call is for calling a specific station. After sending an individual call, called ACK
RQ transmission, wait to receive the acknowledge back (ACK BQ) signal from the receiving
station.
5.1.1
Sending an individual call
1. Press the DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose INDIVIDUAL and then push the ENTER knob.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the STATION ID menu, and then rotate the ENTER knob
to choose MANUAL or SELECT.
4. For SELECT, you can choose an ID from the message file list stored.
5. For MANUAL, use the numeric keys to key in the ID of the station where to send the call
and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
: INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
PRIORITY
COMM MODE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
*********
: ROUTINE
: TELEPHONE
: NO INFO
: 2M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the PRIORITY menu.
Compose msg.
: INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
PRIORITY
ROUTINE
SAFETY
URGENCY
E
COMM. MO
COMM. FRE
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate priority (normally ROUTINE) and then
push the ENTER knob.
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM MODE menu.
For Safety or
Urgency Priority
Compose msg.
TELEPHONE
NBPD
NBDP-FEC
: INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
PRIORITY
COMM MOD
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
: ---------
TELEPHONE
NBDP-ARQ
NBDP-FEC
DATA
GO TO VIEW
9. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communications type desired and then push the
ENTER knob.
10.For routine priority, push the ENTER knob to open the COMM FREQ menu. For safety
and urgency priority, go to step 12.
Compose msg.
: INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
PRIORITY
COMM MOD
COMM FRE
: 123456789
NO INFO
FREQUENCY
CHANNEL
POSITION*
* POSITION is displayed if a coast
station is specified at step 4.
DSC FREQ
: 12M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
11. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication frequency setting method desired
and then push the ENTER knob. For FREQUENCY and CHANNEL, see “How to Set
Working Frequency, Channel” on the next page. NO INFO and POSITION let the
receiving station set the working frequency. Choose NO INFO or POSITION to send the
call to a coast station; FREQUENCY or CHANNEL to send the call to a ship station.
How to Set Working Frequency, Channel
To send a call, set the working frequency as below, to communicate with the receiving
station. The working frequency can be entered by Tx and Rx frequencies or channel
number.
Routine priority
8. After selecting FREQUENCY or CHANNEL, one of the following pop-up windows
appears.
TX:
RX:
0.0 kHz
0.0 kHz
TRX:
(Mobile station, Simplex)
Frequency
0.0 kHz
CH:
Channel
0
(Coast station, Duplex)
a) Key in TX frequency or channel with the numeric keys. For channel, push the ENTER
knob to finish.
b) Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the RX field, key in RX frequency and then push the
ENTER knob to finish.
Safety or urgency priority
For safety or urgency priority the communication frequency cannot be selected; it is
automatically set to the pair frequency as set for the DSC frequency.
12.Follow the instructions on the next page to choose DSC frequency desired.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
How to Set DSC Frequency
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC FREQ and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
Rotate the ENTER
knob to scroll.
ꢀ
MSG TYPE:
STATION ID:
PRIORITY:
COMM MODE:
COMM FREQ:
DSC FREQ
2 MHZ
16 MHZ
18 MHZ
22 MHZ
25 MHZ
4 MHZ
6 MHZ
8 MHZ
12 MHZ
ꢁ
: 2M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC band and then push the ENTER
knob. One of the menus shown below appears depending on the band selected.
Rotate the ENTER knob
Compose msg.
to scroll menu to view user
channels (if registered).
LOCAL = Local channel
MSG TYPE
S
:
2 MHz
INTL
P
:
:
:
T12577.5/R12657.0
ꢀ
LOCAL1
LOCAL2
T12578.0/R12657.5
USER CH1
USER CH2
USER CH3
USER CH4
:
:
:
:
T12345.0/R12345.0
T12345.5/R12345.5
T12346.0/R12346.0
T12346.5/R12346.5
T12578.5/R12658.0
C
C
ꢁ
D
2MHz menu
8MHz menu
18MHz menu
INTL
:T 2189.5/R 2177.0
INTL
:T 8415.0/R 8436.5
INTL
:T18898.5/R19703.5
LOCAL1 :T18899.0/R19704.0
LOCAL2 :T18899.5/R19704.5
LOCAL :T 8415.5/R8437.0
LOCAL :T 8416.0/R8437.5
4MHz menu
12MHz menu
22MHz menu
INTL
:T 4208.0/R 4219.5
INTL
:T 12577.5/R12657.0
INTL
:T 22374.5/R22444.0
LOCAL1 :T 4208.5/R 4220.0
LOCAL2 :T 4209.0/R 4220.5
LOCAL1 :T 12578.0/R12657.5
LOCAL2 :T 12578.5/R12658.0
LOCAL1 :T 22375.0/R22444.5
LOCAL2 :T 22375.5/R22445.0
6MHz menu
25MHz menu
16MHz menu
INTL
:T 6312.5/R 6331.0
INTL
:T 25208.5/R26121.0
INTL
:T 16805.0/R16903.0
LOCAL1 :T 6313.0/R 6331.5
LOCAL2 :T 6313.5/R 6332.0
LOCAL1 :T 25209.0/R26121.5
LOCAL2 :T 25209.5/R26122.0
LOCAL1 :T 16805.5/R16903.5
LOCAL2 :T 16806.0/R16904.0
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC frequency and then push the ENTER knob. The
display shows the DSC frequency band selected, at “DSC FREQ”.
Safety or urgency priority
For safety and/or urgency priority “COMM FREQ” is automatically set to the same pair
frequency as the DSC frequency.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC FREQ and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
2187.5
MSG TYPE:
STATION ID: 4207.5
6312.0
PRIORITY
8414.5
COMM MODE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
12577.0
16804.5
: 2187.5 KHZ
GO TO VIEW
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate frequency and then push the ENTER
knob.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
13.Press the CALL key to send the individual call (transmission time: about seven seconds).
The display shows the message “Individual routine message in progress!” while the call
is being sent.
Individual routine
message in progress!
Note: When the channel is in use,
"CH BUSY" appears at the
lower left-hand side of the
screen.
DESTINATION ID:
123456789
PRIORITY
:
ROUTINE
2138.0 kHz
2177.0 kHz
Press CALL key for forced
transmission.
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
7S
After the call is sent, the equipment waits for acknowledgement of the call, showing the
display below.
Waiting for
acknowledgement.
DESTINATION ID: 123456789
PRIORITY
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
: ROUTINE
2138.0 kHz
2177.0 kHz
TIME TO GO: 4M30S RESENDING
The timer starts counting down the maximum time to wait for acknowledgement, five
minutes. One of the following three messages appears. (“No response! Try calling again?”
appears after the timer counts down to zero. It means the receiving station did not respond.)
No response!
Try calling again?
Unable acknowledge
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
Able acknowledge
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
DESTINATION ID: 123456789
PRIORITY
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
:
ROUTINE
2138.0 kHz
PRIORITY
TELEPHONE
: ROUTINE
2138.0 kHz
SENDER ID
PRIORITY
:
:
123456789
ROUTINE
:
2177.0 kHz
RESEND
Able acknowledge call received
Unable acknowledge call received
No response from station
(appears when the timer counts to "zero")
14.Do one of the following depending on the message shown in step 12.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Able acknowledge call received
Communicating by radiotelephone
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the audio alarm, and the display changes as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
*
*
ABLE ACKNOWLEDGE
SENDER ID:
123456789
PRIORITY : ROUTINE TX:2138.0kHz
TELEPHONE
RX: 2138.0kHz
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
2. Press the CANCEL key to go to the radiotelephone screen.
3. The working frequency is automatically set; you may start voice communications by
radiotelephone.
Sending message by NBDP Terminal Unit
The message “STATION ENTRY COMPLETED FROM DSC. Press any key to escape.”
Appears on the NBDP’s display.
1. Press any key on the NBDP Terminal Unit to erase the message.
2. Press the function key F3 on the keyboard of the NBDP Terminal Unit to show the
Operate menu.
3. Choose “Call Station” and then press the Enter key.
4. “DSC” is selected; press the Enter key. “Connect” appears in reverse video.
5. Type and transmit your message.
6. When you have finished sending your message, press the F10 key to disconnect the
line.
Unable acknowledge call received
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display looks something like the one
below.
Reason for unable to acknowledge:
Received message
NO REASON GIVEN
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:59
CONGESTION AT SWITCHING CENTRE*
BUSY
UNABLE ACKNOWLEDGE
NO REASON GIVEN
QUEUE INDICATION*
STATION BARRED*
SENDER ID: 123456789
NO OPERATOR AVAILABLE*
OPERATOR TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE*
EQUIPMENT DISABLE
PRIORITY:
ROUTINE
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
MODE NOT USABLE
CHANNEL NOT USABLE
* Coast station use
2. If the coast station sends the message “QUEUE INDICATION,” wait until your turn
arrives.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
No response! Try calling again?
Re-send call: Push the ENTER knob followed by pressing the CALL key.
Cancel call: Press the CANCEL key to go to DSC screen.
5.1.2
Receiving an individual call
Acknowledgement is able or unable depending on the comply-type setting (see section
6.11). The relationship between comply type and able/unable acknowledge is as shown in
the table below.
Setting for ACK/SQ key
AUTO ACK
ABLE
UNABLE
Can send ABLE acknowledge Can send UNABLE
automatically
acknowledge automatically.
Send ABLE acknowledge Send UNABLE acknowledge
MANUAL ACK
manually
manually
Note: The handset must be on hook to enable automatic acknowledge.
Sending automatic acknowledge (ACK BQ) with comply type “ABLE”
When an individual call is received and the automatic acknowledge feature is active (AUTO
ACK) and the comply type is “ABLE,” the display shown below appears. This display
indicates that the auto acknowledge (ACK BQ) call is being sent.
Able acknowledge
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID:
123456789
ROUTINE
2138.0 kHz
2177.0 kHz
6S
PRIORITY
:
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
It takes about seven seconds to transmit the call, after which the audio alarm sounds and
the following message appears.
Able acknowledge
message transmitted.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY: ROUTINE TX: 2138.0 kHz
TELEPHONE
RX: 2138.0 kHz
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The following display appears.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Xmitted message
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:01
ABLE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
DESTINATION ID: 123456789
PRIORITY : ROUTINE TX: 2138.0 kHz
TELEPHONE
RX: 2138.0 kHz
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
RESEND
2. Press the CANCEL key. You can now communicate with the party, over the
radiotelephone frequency specified or by the NBDP terminal unit.
Communicating by NBDP Terminal Unit
After acknowledging an individual call, do the following to communicate by NBDP Terminal
Unit. The control unit’s display shows “OCCUPIED” and the Tx and Rx frequencies. The
message from the other station appears on your NBDP Terminal Unit.
1. After receiving the message from other station, type your message and then transmit it.
2. Press the function key F10 (BREAK) to disconnect the line.
Sending automatic acknowledge (ACK BQ) with comply type “UNABLE”
When an individual call is received and the automatic acknowledge feature is active (AUTO
ACK) and comply type is “UNABLE,” the display shown below appears, indicating that the
auto acknowledge call (ACK BQ) with UNABLE is being sent.
Unable acknowledge
message in progress!
REASON: BUSY
DESTINATION ID
PRIORITY
:
121234567
: ROUTINE
DSC FREQ : 12577.5 kHz
TIME TO GO : 6S
It takes about seven seconds to transmit the call, after which the audio alarm sounds and
the following message appears.
Unable acknowledge
message transmitted.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
DESTINATION ID : 121234567
PRIORITY
: ROUTINE
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The following display appears.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Xmitted message
JUL-23-2006-23:01
UNABLE ACKNOWLEDGE
BUSY
*
*
DESTINATION ID : 121234567
PRIORITY
:
ROUTINE
10M10S
RESEND
GO TO VIEW
2. Push the ENTER knob to confirm the message.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to scroll the message.
Manually acknowledging individual call with “ABLE”
When an individual call is received and the equipment is set up with manual acknowledge
(MANUAL ACK), the alarm sounds and the display looks like the one below.
Individual routine
message received.
Ack Required.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
TELEPHONE
CH 401
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes as shown below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:00:00
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
SENDER ID:
PRIORITY:
TELEPHONE
001234567
ROUTINE
CH 401
To view contents, rotate ENTER knob
to choose GO TO VIEW and then push
ENTER knob.
10M10S
ANSWER
GO TO VIEW
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ANSWER and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MSG TYPE and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : ABLE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
ABLE
STATION ID
7
COMM MODE ONE
UNABLE
COMM FREQ : CH 401
DSC FREQ
: 4M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ABLE and then push the ENTER knob. The display
changes as below.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: ABLE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
STATION ID: 121234567
COMM MODE: TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ: CH401
DSC FREQ:
4M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
5. Press the CALL key to send the acknowledge call. The display changes as below.
Able acknowledge
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID
PRIORITY
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
:
121234567
: ROUTINE
CH 401
4208.0 kHz
7S
6. After the call is completely sent (transmission time: 7 sec.), push the CANCEL key twice
to show the radiotelephone screen (if the communications mode is telephone).
7. You can begin voice communications by radiotelephone. For NBDP operation, do the
following:
Communicating by NBDP Terminal Unit
After acknowledging an individual call, do the following to communicate by NBDP Terminal
Unit. The control unit’s display shows “OCCUPIED” and the Tx and Rx frequencies. The
message from the other party appears on your NBDP Terminal Unit.
1. After receiving the message from the other party, type your message and transmit it.
2. Press the function key F10 (BREAK) to disconnect the line.
Manually acknowledging individual call with “UNABLE”
When an individual call is received and the equipment is set up with manual acknowledge,
the alarm sounds and the display shows the message “Individual xxx (priority name)
message received.”
Individual routine
message received.
Ack Required.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
TELEPHONE
CH 401
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes as below.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Received message
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:00:00
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
SENDER ID:
121234567
PRIORITY: ROUTINE
TELEPHONE
CH 401
To view contents, rotate ENTER knob
to choose GO TO VIEW and then push
the ENTER knob.
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
ANSWER
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ANSWER and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MSG TYPE and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : ABLE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
ABLE
STATION ID
7
COMM MODE ONE
UNABLE
COMM FREQ : CH401
DSC FREQ:
4M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose UNABLE and then push the ENTER knob.
5. Push the ENTER knob to open the REASON menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : UNABLE
NO REASON
AC
BUSY
REASON
EQUIP DISABLED
STATION
MODE NOT USABLE
DSC FRE
CH NOT USABLE
6. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose an appropriate reason and then push the ENTER
knob. The display changes as below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : UNABLE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
REASON
: CHANNEL NOT
USABLE
STATION ID : 121234567
DSC FREQ
:
4M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
7. Press the CALL key to send the acknowledge call. The display shows “Unable
acknowledge message in progress!” while the call is being sent.
Unable acknowledge
message in progress!
REASON: CHANNEL NOT USABLE
DESTINATION ID: 121234567
PRIORITY:
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
ROUTINE
4208.0 KHZ
6S
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
The timer counts down the time remaining until the call is completed (transmission time:
about seven seconds).
8. Press the CANCEL key twice to show the radiotelephone screen.
5.2
Group Call
A group call is for calling a specific group by specifying its group ID.
5.2.1
Sending a group call
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
1. Choose GROUP MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
2. Push the ENTER knob to open the GROUP ID menu, and then rotate the ENTER knob
to choose MANUAL or SELECT.
3. For SELECT, you can choose an ID from the message file list stored.
4. For MANUAL, key in group ID (eight digits) with the numeric keys and then push the
ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
: GROUP MESSAGE
MSG TYPE
GROUP ID
PRIORITY
0 * * * * * * * *
: ROUTINE
: TELEPHONE
: NO INFO
COMM MODE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
5. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM MODE menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
GROUP ID
PRIORITY
TELEPHONE
NBDP-FEC
:
COMM MODE
TELEPHONE
: NO INFO
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
6. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication type desired and then push the
ENTER knob.
7. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM FREQ menu.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
:
GROUP MESSAGE
GROUP ID
PRIORITY
:
012345678
FREQUENCY
COMM MODE
CHANNEL
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
GO TO ALL VIEW
GO TO VIEW
8. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication frequency desired and then push the
ENTER knob. (See page 5-3 for details.) NO INFO lets other party choose
communication frequency.
9. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
GROUP ID
PRIORITY
COMM MODE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
MESSAGE
2 MHZ
Rotate the ENTER
knob to select.
4 MHZ
16 MHZ
18 MHZ
22 MHZ
25 MHZ
E
6 MHZ
ONE
8 MHZ
12 MHZ
TL
GO TO VIEW
ꢀ
ꢀ
10.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC band desired and then push the ENTER knob
to open the DSC FREQ menu.
11. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC frequency desired and then push the ENTER
knob. (See “How to Set DSC Frequency” on page 5-4 for details.)
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
GROUP ID
PRIORITY
:
:
GROUP MESSAGE
012345678
: ROUTINE
COMM MODE : TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ : 2164.0 kHz
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
12.Press the CALL key to send the group call (transmission time: about seven seconds).
The display shows “Group message in progress!” while the call is being sent.
Group
message in progress!
SENDER ID :
PRIORITY
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
012345678
ROUTINE
2164.0 kHz
2177.0 kHz
6S
:
:
:
TIME TO GO
13.Press the CANCEL key twice to show the radiotelephone screen after the call is sent.
14.If you selected TELEPHONE at step 7, communicate by radiotelephone. For NBDP, do
the following:
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Sending message by NBDP Terminal Unit
The message “STATION ENTRY COMPLETED FROM DSC. Press any key to escape.”
Appears on the NBDP’s display.
1. Press any key on the NBDP Terminal Unit to erase the message.
2. Press the function key F3 on the keyboard of the NBDP Terminal Unit to show the
Operate menu.
3. Choose “Call Station” and then press the Enter key.
4. “DSC” is selected; press the Enter key. “Connect” appears in reverse video.
5. Type and transmit your message.
6. When you have finished sending your message, press the F10 key to disconnect the
line.
5.2.2
Receiving a group call
Group ID must be registered in order to receive a group call.
The audio alarm sounds and the display shows “Group message received” when a group
call is received.
Group
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY: ROUTINE TX: 2164.0 kHz
TELEPHONE
RX: 2164.0 kHz
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
*
*
GROUP MESSAGE
SENDER ID :
123456789
PRIORITY: ROUTINE TX: 2164.0 kHz
RX: 2164.0 kHz
TELEPHONE
2M14S
GO TO VIEW
2. Press the CANCEL key to go to the radiotelephone screen. Watch on the working
frequency. If there is the difference between the registered frequency and used
frequency to receive, the following screens appear. Choose Agree for the voice
communication, or Disagree when you do not change the frequency.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down xx sec. Pause
Change COM Frequency
Choose "Pause".
Agree
Disagree
Count down has been paused.
After 10 seconds passed or when "Agree" is chosen,
the working frequency is changed with the message
shown below.
Choose "Agree".
Accept New
Working Freq
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
Receiving message by NBDP Terminal Unit
After receiving a group call, confirm the following.
•The control unit’s display shows “OCCUPIED” and the Tx and Rx frequencies.
•The message from the sending station appears on your NBDP Terminal Unit.
5.3
Geographical Area Call
The geographical area call is for sending a call to all ships within the area you designate in
your geographical area call. In the figure below, for example, the call will be sent to all ships
within 24-34°N, 135-140°W (QUAD) and 34°N, 140°W, range: 500 NM (CIRCLE).
Note: At the high-latitude area, set the area so that the longitude is within 99°. If the setting
is over 99°, it may be adjusted automatically.
Reference point
(For example,
34°N 140°W)
34°N
500NM
10°
Reference point
(For example,
34°N 140°W)
24°N
5°
140°W
135°W
QUAD
CIRCLE
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
5.3.1
Sending a geographical area call
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose AREA MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the AREA menu, then choose QUAD or CIRCLE and
push the ENTER knob.
AREA line display
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
: AREA MESSAGE
QUAD
"44 N 125
°
°
E 17
°
21°"
AREA
: SAFETY
: TELEPHONE
: 2182.0 kHz
: 2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
PRIORITY
COMM MODE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
CIRCLE
"44 33N 125 33E 0500NM"
°
°
4. For QUAD: Using the numeric keys, enter latitude and longitude of reference point and
southerly degrees and easterly degrees of area. To change coordinate, choose it and
press the 1 key for North or East; 2 key for South or West. After entering data, push the
ENTER knob.
5. For CIRCLE: Using the numeric keys, enter latitude and longitude of reference point
and radius of area. To change coordinate, choose it and press the 1 key for North or
East; 2 key for South or West. After entering data, push the ENTER knob.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the PRIORITY menu.
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose priority desired and then push the ENTER knob.
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the COM. MODE menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
AREA : 34°N 133°
PRIORITY
: AREA CALL
TELEPHONE
NBDP-FEC
:
COMM MODE :
COMM FREQ : 2182.0 kHz
DSC FREQ
: 2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
9. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication type desired and then push the
ENTER knob.
10. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
11. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC frequency desired and then push the ENTER
knob. (See “How to Set DSC Frequency” on page 5-4 for details.) Your display should
now look something like one below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
: AREA MESSAGE
AREA : 34°N 140°W ↓10° → 5°
PRIORITY
: SAFETY
COMM MODE
COMM FREQ
: TELEPHONE
2182.0 kHz
:
DSC FREQ
: 2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
12. Press the CALL key to send the geographical area call (transmission time: about seven
seconds). The display shows “Geographical area message in progress!” while the call is
being sent.
Geographical area
message in progress!
AREA: 34°N 140°W ↓10° → 5°
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
TELEPHONE
2182.0 kHz
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO
:
:
2187.5 kHz
7S
13. After the call is sent, press the CANCEL key twice to show the radiotelephone screen.
14. If you chose TELEPHONE at step 8, you can now communicate with the other party. For
NBDP, do the following:
Sending message by NBDP Terminal Unit
The message “STATION ENTRY COMPLETED FROM DSC. Press any key to escape.”
Appears on the NBDP’s display.
1. Press any key on the NBDP Terminal Unit to erase the message.
2. Press the function key F3 on the keyboard of the NBDP Terminal Unit to show the
Operate menu.
3. Choose “Call Station” and then press the Enter key.
4. “DSC” is selected; press the Enter key. “Connect” appears in reverse video.
5. Type and transmit your message.
6. When you have finished sending your message, press the F10 key to disconnect the
line.
5.3.2
Receiving a geographical area call
The alarm sounds and the display shows “Geographical area message received” when a
geographical area message is received.
Geographical area
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
SNDER ID:
PRIORITY:
2479
SAFETY
TELEPHONE
2182.0kHz
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. “Change COM Frequency” display appears,
and the display changes as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
*
*
GEOGRAPHICAL AREA
SENDER ID :
123456789
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
TELEPHONE:
2182.0 kHz
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
3. Press the CANCEL key to go to the radiotelephone screen. Watch on the working
frequency specified in the geographic area call. If there is the difference between the
registered frequency and used frequency to receive, the following screens appear.
Choose Agree for the voice communication, or Disagree when you do not change the
frequency.
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down xx sec. Pause
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down has been paused.
Choose "Pause".
After 10 seconds passed or when "Agree" is chosen,
the working frequency is changed with the message
shown below.
Choose "Agree".
Accept New
Working Freq
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
Receiving message by NBDP Terminal Unit
After receiving a geographic area call, confirm the following.
•The control unit’s display shows “OCCUPIED” and the Tx and Rx frequencies.
•The message from the sending station appears on your NBDP Terminal Unit.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
5.4
Neutral Craft Call
The neutral craft call, which contains own ship position and ID, informs all ships that your
ship is not a participant in armed conflict. The neutral craft call is necessary the setting on
the Setup menu. See section “6.15 Special Messages”.
5.4.1
Sending a neutral craft call
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SPECIAL and NEUTRAL in order and then push the
ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the AREA menu and enter the area range as shown on
page 5-16.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the COM. MODE menu.
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication type desired (TELEPHONE or
NBDP-FEC) and then push the ENTER knob.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
** Compose **
2187.5
4207.5
MSG TYPE
6312.0
8414.5
AREA: 44 N 12
PRIORITY
COMM MODE
12577.0
16804.5
:2187.5 kHz
DSC FREQ
kHz
VIEW
GO TO VIEW
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate frequency and then push the ENTER
knob.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : NEUTRAL
CRAFT
: 44 N 140 W 10
: URGENCY
AREA
PRIORITY
5
COMM MODE : TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ : 2182.0 kHz
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
8. Press the CALL key to send the neutral craft call (transmission time: approx. 7 sec.).
Neutral craft
message in progress!
AREA
PRIORITY:
: 34 N 140 W 10
5
URGENCY
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
2187.5 kHz
7S
9. After the call is sent, press the CANCEL key twice to show the radiotelephone screen.
10.Inform all ships by radiotelephone that your ship is not a participant in armed conflict.
Sending message by NBDP Terminal Unit
The message “STATION ENTRY COMPLETED FROM DSC. Press any key to escape.”
Appears on the NBDP’s display.
1. Press any key on the NBDP Terminal Unit to erase the message.
2. Press the function key F3 on the keyboard of the NBDP Terminal Unit to show the
Operate menu.
3. Choose “Call Station” and then press the Enter key.
4. “DSC” is selected; press the Enter key. “Connect” appears in reverse video.
5. Type and transmit your message.
6. When you have finished sending your message, press the F10 key to disconnect the
line.
5.4.2
Receiving a neutral craft call
When a neutral craft call is received the alarm sounds and the display changes as below.
Neutral craft
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY:
TELEPHONE
URGENSY
2182.0 kHz
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The working frequency confirmation
window appears for 10 seconds. The display changes as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
NEUTRAL CRAFT
SENDER ID:
123456789
PRIORITY:
TELEPHONE
URGENCY
2182.0 kHz
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
2. Press the CANCEL key to go to the radiotelephone screen. Watch on the working
frequency specified by radiotelephone or NBDP. If there is the difference between the
registered frequency and used frequency to receive, the following screens appear.
Choose Agree for the voice communication, or Disagree when you do not change the
frequency.
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down xx sec. Pause
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down has been paused.
Choose "Pause".
After 10 seconds passed or when "Agree" is chosen,
the working frequency is changed with the message
shown below.
Choose "Agree".
Accept New
Working Freq
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
Receiving message by NBDP Terminal Unit
After receiving a neutral craft call, confirm the following.
The control unit’s display shows “OCCUPIED” and the Tx and Rx frequencies.
The message from the sending station appears on your NBDP Terminal Unit.
5.5
Medical Transport Call
The medical transport call informs all ships, by urgency priority, that own ship carries
medical supplies. The medical call is enabled/disable with the Setup menu setting. See
section “6.15 Special Messages”.
5.5.1
Sending a medical transport call
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SPECIAL and MEDICAL in order and then push the
ENTER knob. PRIORITY is automatically selected to URGENCY.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the AREA menu and then enter the area range as shown
on page 5-17.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM MODE menu.
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication type desired (TELEPHONE or
NBDP-FEC) and then push the ENTER knob.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Compose msg.
2187.5
4207.5
MSG TYPE
6312.0
AREA: 44 N 1
PRIORITY
COMM MODE
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
kHz
DSC FREQ
GO TO VIEW
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate frequency and then push the ENTER
knob. The display changes as below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
: MEDICAL
TRANSPORT
AREA :44 N 125 E 17 21
PRIORITY
: URGENCY
COMM MODE : TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ : 2182.0 kHz
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 KHZ
GO TO VIEW
8. Press the CALL key to send the call (transmission time: about seven seconds). The
display shows “Medical transport message in progress!” while the call is being sent.
Medical transport
message in progress!
AREA:
PRIORITY:
42N 123 E 5 10
URGENCY
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
7S
TIME TO GO :
9. After the call is sent, press the CANCEL key twice to show the radiotelephone screen.
10.Inform all ships (by radiotelephone) that your ship is transporting medical supplies. For
NBDP do the following:
Sending message by NBDP Terminal Unit
The message “STATION ENTRY COMPLETED FROM DSC. Press any key to escape.”
Appears on the NBDP’s display.
1. Press any key on the NBDP Terminal Unit to erase the message.
2. Press the function key F3 on the keyboard of the NBDP Terminal Unit to show the
Operate menu.
3. Choose “Call Station” and then press the Enter key.
4. “DSC” is selected; press the Enter key. “Connect” appears in reverse video.
5. Type and transmit your message.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
6. When you have finished sending your message, press the F10 key to disconnect the
line.
5.5.2
Receiving a medical transport call
When a medical transport call is received, the alarm sounds and the display changes as
below.
Medical transport
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY:
TELEPHONE
URGENCY
2182.0 KHZ
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. After the “Change COM Frequency” display,
the display changes as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
MEDICAL TRANSPORT
SENDER ID:
PRIORITY:
123456789
URGENCY
TELEPHONE
2182.0 kHz
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
2. Press the CANCEL key to go to the radiotelephone screen to watch on frequency
specified. If there is the difference between the registered frequency and used frequency
to receive, the following screens appear. Choose Agree for the voice communication, or
Disagree when you do not change the frequency.
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down xx sec. Pause
Change COM Frequency
Agree Disagree
Count down has been paused.
Choose "Pause".
After 10 seconds passed or when "Agree" is chosen,
the working frequency is changed with the message
shown below.
Choose "Agree".
Accept New
Working Freq
CANCEL: CLOSE WINDOW
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Receiving message by NBDP Terminal Unit
After receiving a medical transport area call, confirm the following.
The control unit’s display shows “OCCUPIED” and the Tx and Rx frequencies.
The message from the sending station appears on your NBDP Terminal Unit.
5.6
Receiving a Polling Request
Polling means confirming if own station is within communicating range with other station.
1 Polling
2 Acknowledge
5.6.1
Automatic reply
The display changes as shown in the illustration below when a polling request message is
received
Polling acknowledge
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID :
PRIORITY:
123456789
ROUTINE
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO :
:
2177.0 kHz
7S
The equipment is set up for automatic acknowledge: POLLING MESSAGE on the Auto Ack
menu is ON and the 5/ACK/ SQ key is set to show AUTO ACK on the display. For details
see paragraph 6.11. (PRIORITY: ROUTINE only) After the polling acknowledge message is
transmitted, the following display appears and the audio alarm sounds.
Polling acknowledge
message transmitted.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY:
ROUTINE
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes as below.
**Xmitted message **
MAR-23-2006-23:00:09
POLLING ACKNOWLEDGE
DESTINATION ID : 123456789
PRIORITY:
ROUTINE
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
RESEND
2. Press the CANCEL key to return to the radiotelephone screen.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
5.6.3
Manual reply
The display changes as shown in the illustration below. The audio alarm sounds when a
polling request message is received and the status of the 5/ ACK/SQ key is MANUAL ACK
(or AUTO ACK and POLLING MESSAGE in AUTO ACK menu is OFF).
Polling request
message received.
CNCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY:
ROUTINE
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes as below.
Received message
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:01
POLLING REQUEST
SENDER ID :
PRIORITY:
987654321
ROUTINE
10M10S
GOTO VIEW
ANSWER
2. To ignore the call, press the CANCEL key.
3. To respond to the call, rotate the ENTER knob to choose ANSWER and then push the
ENTER knob. The display changes as below.
Compose msg
MSG TYPE : POLLING
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
STATION ID
PRIORITY
:
987654321
: ROUTINE
2M-INTL
:
DSC FREQ
GO TO VIEW
4. Press the CALL key to send the polling acknowledge message. The display changes as
below.
Polling acknowledge
Polling acknowledge
message in progress!
message transmitted.
DESTINATION ID : 987654321
PLEASE PUSH CANCEL KEY.
PRIORITY :
ROUTINE
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
2177.0 kHz
7S
CANCEL key (twice)
Radiotelephone screen
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
5.7
Position Call
There are two types of position calls: other station requires your ship’s position and your
ship requests position of another ship.
Finding position of other station
(1) Position request call
(2) Position Information
Own Station
Other Station
Sending own ship’s position to other station
(1) Requests ship's position
(2) Sends position Information
Own Ship
5.7.1
Requesting other ship’s position
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
MAN 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose POSITION and then push the ENTER knob.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the STATION ID menu, and then rotate the ENTER knob
to choose MANUAL or SELECT. For SELECT, you can choose an ID from the message
file list stored. For MANUAL, key in ID of station (nine digits) which you want to know its
position and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE:
POSITION
REQUEST
STATION ID
PRIORITY
DSC FREQ
**********
: SAFETY
: 2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu, and then rotate the ENTER knob
to choose appropriate frequency.
5. Push the ENTER knob. The display now looks something like the illustration below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : POSITION
REQUEST
STATION ID
PRIORITY
DSC FREQ
:
:
123456789
SAFETY
: 2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
6. Press the CALL key to send the message (transmission time: about seven seconds).
The following display appears.
Position request
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID : 123456789
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
2187.5 kHz
7S
After the call has been sent, the following display appears.
Waiting for position
acknowledgement.
DESTINATION ID : 123456789
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
DSC FREQ :
2187.5 kHz
TIME TO GO: 4M30S
RESENDING
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
One of the following messages appears. “No response! Try calling again?” appears after the
time has counted down to zero, meaning there was no response from the party called.
No response!
Position acknowledge
Try calling again?
messsage received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
DESTINATION ID: 123456789
PRIORITY:
POS : 12 34.0000N
123 45.0000E
SAFETY
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 KHZ
AT 12:34
RESEND
Position acknowledge message received
No response
7. Do one of the following depending on the message displayed at step 6.
Acknowledge message received
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display looks as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
*
*
POSITION ACKNOWLEDGE
SENDER ID :
PRIORITY:
123456789
SAFETY
POS : 12 34N
123 45E
AT 12:34 10M10S
GO TO VIEW
2. You can now confirm position of other ship.
No response! Try calling again?
Re-send call: Push the ENTER knob followed by the CALL key.
Cancel call: Press the CANCEL key.
5.7.2
Position call: other ship requests your position
You may turn automatic acknowledge of position request on with “POSITION MESSAGE:
On” on the Auto Ack menu. For further details, see section 6.11.
Automatic reply
When another ship requests your position and the status of the 5/ ACK/SQ key is AUTO
ACK and the setting of POSITION MESSAGE on the Auto ack menu is ON, the equipment
transmits own position data (transmission time: approx. 7 sec.), showing the display below.
Position acknowledge
message in progress!
123456789
SAFETY
DESTINATION ID :
PRIORITY:
POS: 35°30N
135°30E
AT 23:54
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
TIME TO GO :
7S
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
After the call is sent the audio alarm sounds and the display below appears.
Position acknowledge
message transmitted.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY: SAFETY
POS: 35°30N
135°30E
AT 23:54
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm, and the display changes as below.
**Xmitted message **
MAR-23-2006-23:59:09
POSITION ACKNOWLEDGE
DESTINATION ID : 987654321
PRIORITY: SAFETY
POS :
35°00N
135°00E
AT 23:59 10M10S
GO TO VIEW
RESEND
2. Press the CANCEL key to return to the radiotelephone screen.
Manual reply
When a position request message is received and the status of the 5/ ACK/SQ key is
MANUAL ACK (or AUTO ACK and POSITION MESSAGE on AUTO ACK menu is OFF), the
audio alarm sounds and the display changes as below.
Position request
message received.
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
1. Press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes as below.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:00:01
*
*
POSITION REQUEST
SENDER ID :
PRIORITY:
123456789
SAFETY
10M10S
ANSWER GO TO VIEW
2. If canceling to send the reply, press the CANCEL key.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ANSWER and then push the ENTER knob. Your
display should now look something like the one below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE: POSITION
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
POS:
35 00 N
135 00 E
AT 23:01
DSC FREQ :
2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
4. Confirm the position shown and then press the CALL to send the position data
(transmission time: approx. 7 sec.). The display changes as below.
Position acknowledge
message in progress!
Position acknowledge
messsage transmitted.
DESTINATION ID : 123456789
PLEASE PUSH CANCEL KEY
PRIORITY:
SAFETY
POS: 35 00N
135 00E AT 23:01
Press the CANCEL key twice.
Radiotelephone screen
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
TIME TO GO:
7S
5.8
PSTN Call
The PSTN call allows the making and receiving of telephone calls over public switched
telephone networks. To use the PSTN call feature, use a handset which has a HOOK
ON/OFF function. The standard supply handset has this feature.
5.8.1
Sending a PSTN call, receiving acknowledge back (ACK BQ)
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI I23456789
UTC 01:53
MAN 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose PSTN MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the COAST ID menu, and then rotate the ENTER knob
to choose MANUAL or SELECT. For SELECT, you can choose an ID from the message
file list stored. For MANUAL, key in ID of coast station (seven digits) with the numeric
keys and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
PSTN MESSAGE
*********
MSG TYPE:
COAST ID
TEL NO. :
COMM MODE: TELEPHONE
:12M-INTL
DSC FREQ
GO TO VIEW
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the TEL NO. menu.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE:
COAST ID
TEL NO.
PSTN MESSAGE
: 001234567
----------------
COMM MODE
:12M-INTL
DSC FREQ
GO TO VIEW
5. Enter telephone no. (up to 16 digits) with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER
knob.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM MODE menu, and then choose the
communication mode.
7. Push the ENTER knob.
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Rotate ENTER knob
Compose msg.
to scroll.
ꢁ
16 MHz
18 MHz
22 MHz
25 MHz
2 MHz
LL
MSG TYPE
COAST ID
4 MHz
89
6 MHz
TEL NO.
COMM MODE
9012345
8 MHz
12 MHz
ꢀ
DSC FREQ
GO TO VIEW
9. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC band desired and then push the ENTER knob
to open the DSC FREQ menu.
10.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DSC frequency desired and then push the ENTER
knob. The display changes as below.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE : PSTN MESSAGE
COAST ID : 001234567
TEL NO. : 1234567890123456
COMM MODE :TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
:
12M-INTL
GO TO VIEW
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
11. Press the CALL key to send the PSTN call (transmission time: about seven seconds).
The display shows the following message.
PSTN request
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID :001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
12577.5 kHz
7S
One of the following three displays appears. (“No response! Try calling again?” appears
after timer counts down to zero and it means there was no response from the coast station.)
Waiting for
acknowledgement.
Unable acknowledge
message received.
No response!
Try calling again?
DESTINATION ID : 001234567
DESTINATION ID : 001234567
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
SENDER ID :
TEL NO.
001234567
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ :
12577.5 kHz
DSC FREQ
:
12577.5 kHz
RESEND
TIME TO GO: 25S
RESENDING
12.Do one of the following depending on the message shown in step 11.
Waiting for acknowledgement
If the PSTN call is accepted, the PSTN connection call is sent (transmission time: about
seven seconds), showing the display below.
PSTN connection
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID
:
001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
2222.2kHz
TELEPHONE:
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
12577.5 KHZ
7S
After the call is sent the following messages appears.
Waiting for
acknowledgement.
SENDER ID :
001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
TELEPHONE: 2222.2kHz
DSC FREQ :
12577.5 KHZ
TIME TO GO: 25S
RESENDING
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
Then, one of the following displays appears.
PSTN connected.
PSTN end of
message in progress!
DESTINATION
TEL NO.
TELEPHONE: 2222.2kHz
:
001234567
DESTINATION
TEL NO.
:
001234567
:
1234567890123456
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ : 12577.5 KHZ
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
12577.5 KHZ
8S
PSTN call connected
PSTN end of call
13.Follow the instructions below depending on the message shown in 3) above.
PSTN connected: Your phone rings; pick up the handset and communicate with the party
you called.
PSTN end of message in progress: The channel could not be used. Press the CANCEL
key to return to the DSC standby screen.
Unable acknowledge message received
1. The audio alarm sounds; press the CANCEL key or ENTER knob to silence the alarm.
The display shown below appears.
Received message
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:01
UNABLE ACKNOWLEDGE
BUSY
SENDER ID :
TEL NO.
001234567
:
1234567890123456
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
2. Press the CANCEL key to return to the DSC standby screen.
3. Try the call again later.
No response! Try calling again?
Re-send call: Push the ENTER knob followed by the CALL key.
Cancel call: Press the CANCEL key to return to the radiotelephone screen.
5.8.2
Receiving a PSTN call, sending acknowledge back (ACK BQ)
The following display appears when a PSTN call is received when automatic acknowledge
is turned on.
Able acknowledge
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID : 001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
4208.0 KHZ
8S
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
The timer counts down to zero and then the following display appears.
Pick up the handset
or press CALL key.
DESTINATION ID :001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
TELEPHONE: 2222.2kHz
DSC FREQ :
4208.0 KHZ
TIME TO GO: 60S RESENDING
1. Pick up the handset or press the CALL key within one minute.
PSTN connection
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID : 001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
TELEPHONE: 2222.2kHz
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
4208.0 KHZ
7S
The timer counts down to zero and then the following display appears.
Waiting for
acknowledgement.
SENDER ID :
001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
TELEPHONE: 2222.2kHz
DSC FREQ :
2222.2 KHZ
TIME TO GO: 25S RESENDING
Shortly thereafter, one of the following messages appears.
PSTN connected.
PSTN end of
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID
:
001234567
DESTINATION ID : 001234567
TEL NO.
TELEPHONE
DSC FREQ
:
1234567890123456
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
:
2222.2 kHz
4208.0KHZ
:
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
4208.0KHZ
7S
PSTN call connected
PSTN end of call
2. Do one of the following depending on the message shown at step 5. Note that volume
can be adjusted in this condition. Rotate the PWR/VOL knob.
PSTN connected: Communicate with party.
PSTN end of message in progress!: The channel could not be used. Press the CANCEL
key to return to the DSC standby screen.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
5.8.3
PSTN call disconnection, receiving charge information
(ship disconnects line)
1. After hanging up the handset or pressing the CANCEL key to complete your call, the
display shows the following message.
PSTN end of
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID :
001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ :
TIME TO GO:
12577.5 KHZ
8S
After the call is sent, the following messages appears.
Waiting for
charge information.
DESTINATION ID :001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ :
12577.5 KHZ
TIME TO GO: 20S
RESENDING
When the timer counts down to zero one of the following displays appear.
Charge information
message received.
No response!
charge information.
DESTINATION ID :001234567
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
DSC FREQ:
xxxx.xkHz
For “No response! Charge information.”, the equipment reverts to step 2 in this
procedure to await charge information.
2. For “Charge information message received.”, the audio alarm sounds; press the
CANCEL key or ENTER knob to silence the audio alarm. The display shown below
appears.
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
CHARGE INFORMATION
*
*
CHARGE TIME :
SENDER ID :
00H 12M 34S
001234567
TEL NO.
:
1234567890123456
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
5.8.4
PSTN call disconnection, receiving charge information
(coast station disconnects line)
The PSTN line is disconnected by the coast station when it finds no evidence of
communications or the land subscriber hangs up. The coast station then sends charge
information as below.
Received message
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:59
CHARGE INFORMATION
CHARGE TIME : 00H 12M 34S
SENDER ID :
TEL NO.
001234567
:
1234567890123456
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
For no charge information the display looks as below.
Received message
*
*
MAR-23-2006-23:59
CHARGE INFORMATION
CHARGE TIME : NO INFO
SENDER ID :
TEL NO.
001234567
1234567890123456
10M10S
GO TO VIEW
5.9
Log File
Three log files are provided for storage of calls: received ordinary log, received distress log
and transmitted log. Each log file stores 50 calls. The latest call is saved as log no.1 and the
log no. of all previous calls in that log increments by one. When the storage capacity is
exceeded, the oldest call is deleted to make room for the latest. An asterisk (*) marks
unread or unacknowledged calls. Received distress calls are automatically deleted 48 hours
after being read.
5.9.1
Opening a log file
The procedure for opening a log is common to all logs. The example below shows how to
open the received distress log.
1. Press the LOG/TUNE key momentary to open the Log file menu.
WATCHSKEeElePcINtGlog file ACK
DISTR
2187
0
5
RECEIVED ORDINARY
1680
RECEIVED DISTRESS
ROUTI
TRANSMITTED
217
0
8436.5
12657.0
16903.0
35°00.000N
135°00.000E 23:59
MANUAL
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose desired log and push the ENTER knob. For example,
choose the RECEIVED DISTRESS log and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to scroll the log. Asterisk indicates unread message.
Rcvd distress log
Rcvd distress log
*
*
*
*
01.APR-10-19:58
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
45.MAR-01-23:45
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
DISTRESS
NEW
*
*
*
*
*
*
02.APR-10-19:56
03.APR-10-13:45
04.APR-10-11:52
05.APR-10-11:43
46.FEB-28-19:56
47.FEB-28-19:48
48.FEB-28-19:44
49.FEB-21-12:36
50.FEB-17-12:34
*
Scroll with
the ENTER
knob.
06.MAR-22-21:18 DISTRESS
OLD
4. To view the contents of a file, do the following:
a) Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the file desired and then push the ENTER knob.
DETAIL
DELETE
b) DETAIL is selected; push the ENTER knob.
Received message
*
*
FEB-17-2006-12:34:56
DISTRESS ALERT
SHIP ID IN DIST :
987654321
NATURE : UNDESIGNATED
POS : 12 34.0000N DIST: 43nm
123 45.0000E AT 12:34
TELEPHONE
2182.0 KHZ
10M10S
PREV
GO TO VIEW
NEXT ANSWER
5. To scroll the log up and down, use the FILE/CURSOR and #/SETUP keys,
respectively. Use FILE/CURSOR key to scroll forward; the #/SETUP to scroll backward.
6. To print all files in the log selected, press the 8/PRINT key.
7. To reply to an unanswered call, rotate the ENTER knob to choose ANSWER, press
the ENTER knob, and then press the CALL key.
8. To return to the log selected, press the CANCEL key.
5.9.2
Deleting log files
1. Do steps 1-3 and 4a) in the previous procedure to choose the file you wish to delete.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DELETE and then press the ENTER knob.
The log files are renumbered to reflect the deletion.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. ROUTINE MESSAGE CALLING, RECEVING
This page is intentionally left blank.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
The menu, consisting of main menus, provides access to less-often used function. It can be
accessed from both the RT and DSC screens.
1. Press the #/SETUP key to show the main menu.
MENU
HS. VOL 32
NB ON
DATE/TIME
MEM CLR
USR SETUP
SYS SETUP
SQ 2000Hz
USER CH
MESSAGE
POSITION
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and press the ENTER knob to show
the Setup menu.
Setup
ALARM
SOUND
AUTO ACK
PRINT OUT
SCAN FREQ
KEY ASSIGN
SPECIAL MSG
FAX Rx DIS
HOOK SP OFF
TIMER 10MIN
6.1
Adjusting Handset Volume
Adjust handset volume from the HANDSET VOLUME window as follows:
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Choose HS. VOL and then push the ENTER knob to display the HANDSET VOLUME
window.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust volume, and then push the ENTER knob.
HANDSET
VOLUME (0~63)
ꢀ
ꢀ
63
4. Press the CANCEL key.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.2
Noise Blanker
The noise blanker functions to remove pulse noise. You may turn it on or off as follows.
Normally, use it with OFF (default setting).
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose NB.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ON or OFF as appropriate, and then push the
ENTER knob.
5. Press the CANCEL key.
“NB” appears in the equipment states area when choosing ON at step 4.
6.3
Squelch Frequency
If you change the squelch frequency (ex. For high voice), do the following procedure.
(default setting: 800Hz)
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SQ.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. Enter frequency (range: 500-2000 Hz) with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER
knob.
5. Press the CANCEL key.
6.4
User Channels
The USER CH menu allows registration and deleting of user TX and RX channels, where
permitted by the Authorities. Maximum 256 channels can be registered.
NOTICE
FURUNO will assume no responsibility
for the disturbance caused by the
unlawful or improper setting of user
channels.
6.4.1
Registering user channels
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USER CH and then push the ENTER knob.
ꢀ M*O*DE*: USsSeBr ch entry **
ꢁCH: 2-01
00201. TX: 2111.5 RX: 2111.5
00202. TX: 2222.0 RX: 2222.0
00203. TX: 2333.5 RX: 2333.5
00204. TX: 2444.0 RX: 2444.0
00205. TX: 2555.5 RX: 2555.5
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the user channel options window.
***User ch entry **2-01
ꢀMODE: SSB
ꢁCH:
00201. TX: 2111.5 RX: 2111.5
00202. TRX: 2222.0
MODE
00203. TRX: 2333.5
CH
00204. TRX: 2444.0
FREQ
00205. TX: 2555.5 RX: 2555.5
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MODE and then push the ENTER knob.
***User ch enꢁtrCyH*: *
ꢀMODE:
2-01
SSB
00201. TRX: 2111.5
NBDP
DSC
00202. TRX: 2222.0
CW
00203. TRX: 2333.5
00204. TX: 2444.0 RX: 2444.0
00205. TX: 2555.5 RX: 2555.5
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate mode among SSB, NBDP and DSC and
then push the ENTER knob.
- 256 channels may be registered.
- Band no. setting range is 1-29 and band channel no. range is
01-99.
- For DSC, four channels can be registered per band (2, 4, 6
8, 12, 16, 18, 22, 25).
***User chꢁentry**
ꢀMODE: SSB
C H : 0 − 0 0
00201. TX: 2101.5 RX: 2101.5
00202. TX: 2202.0 RX: 2202.0
00203. TX: 2303.5 RX: 2303.5
00204. TX: 2404.0 RX: 2404.0
00205. TX: 2505.5 RX: 2505.5
6. Key in channel no. and then push the ENTER knob. For example, press 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and
then push the ENTER knob to enter channel 01234.
**User ch entry **
ꢀMODE : SSB
ꢁ CH : 12-34
01234. TX:
0.0 RX:
0.0
01240. TX: 12666.0 RX: 13666.0
01241. TX: 12777.5 RX: 13777.5
TX :
0.0 kHz
0.0 kHz
01242. TX:
RX :
01250. TX:
7. Enter TX frequency with the numeric keys.
8. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose RX.
9. Enter RX frequency with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob.
10.Rotate the ENTER knob to display all channels entered.
11. Press the CANCEL key twice.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.4.2
Deleting user channels
Deleting individual user channels
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USER CH and then push the ENTER knob twice.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose CH and then push the ENTER knob.
4. Key in the channel number to be deleted, and then push the ENTER knob.
5. Tx and Rx frequencies are shown as “0.0 kHz”; push the ENTER knob to delete
channel.
6. Press the CANCEL key twice to return to the radiotelephone screen.
Deleting all user channels
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MEM CLR and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USER CHANNELS and then push the ENTER knob.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES and then push the ENTER knob.
5. Press the CANCEL key twice to return to the radiotelephone screen.
6.5
Preparing TX Message
For the individual, PSTN, Group and Test messages, you can create messages and store
them in the memory for future use. You can recall these messages, for editing or sending,
with the */FILE/CURSOR key. Maximum 100 messages can be stored into the memory.
6.5.1
Preparing individual calls
1. Press the #/SETUP key to open the setup menu.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MESSAGE.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the MSG TYPE menu.
Message file entry
*
INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
PSTN MESSAGE
STATION ID
TEST MESSAGE
COMM MODE
GROUP MESSAGE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose INDIVIDUAL and then push the ENTER knob.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the STATION ID entry window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE
: INDIVIDUAL
00
STATION ID
-
0
0
-
0
--
0
-
0
00
--
COMM MODE : TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ : NO INFO
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
7. Key in ID of coast station or ship station with the numeric keys and then push the
ENTER knob.
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM MODE window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE
: I
TELEPHONE
STATION ID : 0
NBDP
COMM MODE : NBDP-FEC
COMM FREQ : NO INFO
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
9. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose communication type desired and then push the
ENTER knob.
10.Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM FREQ window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE:
INDIVIDUAL
STATION ID : 123456789
NO INFO
COMM MODE :
FREQUENCY
COMM FREQ :
CHANNEL
:
POSITION*
DSC FREQ
* NO INFO and POSITION appears
when coast station ID is entered in
the field STATION ID.
11.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate item and then push the ENTER knob.
Call to coast station: NO INFO or POSITION.
Call to ship station: FREQUENCY or CHANNEL. Enter appropriate frequency or
channel, referring to page 5-3.
12.Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Rotate ENTER knob
to scroll.
Message2fMileHZentry
*
4 MHZ
MSG TYPE
STATION ID :
: L
16 MHZ
18 MHZ
22 MHZ
25 MHZ
6 MHZ
8 MHZ
COMM MODE : E
12 MHZ
COMM FREQ :
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INL
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
13.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC band and then push the ENTER
knob.
14.Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC frequency and then push the
ENTER knob.
15.Enter file name and number as shown below.
How to Enter File Name and Number
1. Push the ENTER knob to open the file name entry window.
Message file entry
*
FILE NAME
FILE NUMBER : ---
FILE ENTRY
2. Use the numeric keys and ENTER knob to enter file name (max. 16 characters). For
example, enter FURUNO as the file name.
Key and available character, symbol
: 1→(blank)→1
2ABC : 2→A→B→C→2
How to enter "FURUNO" as file name
1
1. Press the 3 key to display F.
2. Rotate ENTER knob to shift cursor
3. Press the 8 key to select U.
.
3DEF
4GHI
5JKL
: 3→D→E→F→3
: 4→G→H→I→4
: 5→J→K→L→5
4. Rotate ENTER knob to shift cursor
5. Press the 7 key to select R.
.
6MNO : 6→M→N→O→6
6. Rotate ENTER knob to shift cursor
7. Press the 8 key to select U.
8. Rotate ENTER knob to shift cursor
9. Press the 6 key to select N.
.
.
7PQRS : 7→P→Q→R→S→7
8TUV
: 8→T→U→V→8
9WXYZ : 9→W→X→Y→Z→9
: 0→_→ →0
0
−
10. Rotate ENTER knob to shift cursor
11. Press the 6 key to select O.
12. Push the ENTER knob.
.
1. Rotate ENTER knob to select location.
2. Press appropriate key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the file number entry window. Key in file number in three
digits with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob. For example, press 0, 0, 1,
ENTER knob to enter file number 001.
Note: The available file number is 001-799 and
900-999.
Message file entry
*
FILE NAME
: FURUNO
FILE NUMBER :
001
FILE ENTRY
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
4. Push the ENTER knob. The display shows the name and file number entered.
Message file entry
If the file name or number exists the message
"Duplicate name (number) ! Overwrite OK?" appears.
Push the ENTER knob to write over the name, or
press the CANCEL key to escape.
*
FURUNO
No.001 file entered
Go to next file?
YES: [ENT] key
NO: [CANCEL] key
FILE ENTRY
5. Push the ENTER knob to continue
6.5.2
Preparing group calls
To receive the group calls, registering of the group ID is necessary as below.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MESSAGE.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the MSG TYPE menu.
Message file entry
*
INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
PSTN MESSAGE
STATION ID
TEST MESSAGE
COMM MODE
GROUP MESSAGE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose GROUP MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the GROUP ID entry window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE:
GROUP MESSAGE
GROUP ID
--------
000000000
COMM MODE : TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ : NO INFO
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
7. Key in ID of group with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM MODE menu.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE:
GROUP ID
GROUP MESSAGE
: 012345678
COMM MODE :
TELEPHONE
COMM FREQ :
NBDP-FEC
: 2M-INTL
DSC FREQ
9. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate communications type and then push the
ENTER knob.
10. Push the ENTER knob to open the COMM FREQ menu.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE:
GROUP ID
COMM MODE :
CHANNEL
GROUP MESSAGE
: 012345678
FREQUENCY
COMM FREQ :
DSC FREQ
:
11. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate item and then push the ENTER knob.
12. Enter frequency or channel.
13.Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Rotate ENTER knob
to scroll.
Messag2MHZ
4 MHZ
MSG TYPE
GROUP ID
: L
6 MHZ
16 MHZ
18 MHZ
22 MHZ
25 MHZ
:
8 MHZ
COMM MODE : E
12 MHZ
COMM FREQ :
DSC FREQ
:
2M-INTL
14. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC band and then push the ENTER
knob.
15. Choose appropriate DSC frequency and then push the ENTER knob.
16.Follow “How to Enter File Name and Number” on page 6-6 to enter file name and
number.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.5.3
Preparing PSTN calls
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MESSAGE.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the MSG TYPE menu.
Message file entry
*
INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
PSTN MESSAGE
STATION ID
TEST MESSAGE
COMM MODE
GROUP MESSAGE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose PSTN MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the COAST ID entry window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE
COAST ID
TEL NO.
: PSTN MESSAGE
-------
000000000
:
----------------
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
7. Key in ID of coast station (seven digits) with the numeric keys then push the ENTER
knob.
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the TEL. NO. entry window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE:
COAST ID
PSTN MESSAGE
: 001234567
TEL NO.
:
----------------
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
9. Key in telephone no. (up to 16 digits) with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER
knob.
10.Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Rotate the ENTER knob
Message f2ileMeHnZtry
to scroll.
*
4 MHZ
MSG TYPE:
COAST ID
TEL NO. :
P
6 MHZ
16 MHZ
18 MHZ
22 MHZ
25 MHZ
0
8 MHZ
1--
12 MHZ
DSC FREQ
: 2M-INTL
TL
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
11. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC band and then push the ENTER
knob.
12. Choose appropriate DSC frequency and then push the ENTER knob.
13.Follow “How to Enter File Name and Number” on page 6-6 to enter file name and
number.
6.5.4
Preparing test call
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the MSG TYPE menu.
Message file entry
*
INDIVIDUAL
MSG TYPE
PSTN MESSAGE
STATION ID
TEST MESSAGE
COMM MODE
GROUP MESSAGE
COMM FREQ
DSC FREQ
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TEST MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
5. Push the ENTER knob to open the STATION ID entry window.
Message file entry
*
MSG TYPE
: TEST
000000000
STATION ID
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 KHZ
6. Enter station ID where to send the test message and then push the ENTER knob.
7. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu.
Message file entry
*
2187.5
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
DSC FREQ
KHZ
8. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose appropriate DSC frequency and then push the
ENTER knob.
9. Follow “How to Enter File Name and Number” on page 6-6 to enter file name and
number.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.5.5
Sending prepared messages
Sending without modification
1. Press the FILE/CURSOR key at the DSC standby screen to show the send message file
list. Below is an example of the send message file list.
Send message file
001 : FURUNO JAPAN
002 : FURUNO USA
003 : FURUNO UK
004 : FURUNO DENMARK
005 : FURUNO NORWAY
006 : FURUNO SPAIN
ꢀDOWN
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose a file.
3. Press the CALL key to send the message.
Editing before sending
1. Press the FILE/CURSOR key at the DSC standby screen to show the send message file
list.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose file desired and then push the ENTER knob.
DETAIL
DELETE
3. DETAIL is selected; push the ENTER knob. The message contents are shown on the
“Compose msg.” Screen.
4. Edit the message as necessary.
5. Press the CALL key to send the message.
6.5.6
Deleting send message
Deleting send messages individually
1. Press the FILE/CURSOR key at the DSC standby screen to show the send message file
list.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose file desired and then push the ENTER knob.
DETAIL
DELETE
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DELETE and then push the ENTER knob.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
Deleting all messages
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the MEM CLR.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the MESSAGE FILES.
4. Push the ENTER knob.
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES.
6. Push the ENTER knob.
6.5.7
Printing List of Send Message Files
You can print a list of send message files as follows:
1. Press the FILE/CURSOR key to open the Send message file list.
2. Press the 8/PRINT key.
3. YES is selected; push the ENTER knob to print.
********** Send message file **********
001. FURUNO JAPAN
002. FURUNO USA
003. FURUNO UK
INDIVIDUAL MESSAGE
INDIVIDUAL MESSAGE
PSTN MESSAGE
004. FURUNO DENMARK GROUP MESSAGE
005. FURUNO NORWAY
006. FURUNO SPAIN
007. FURUNO FRANCE
INDIVIDUAL MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
INDIVIDUAL MESSAGE
Note: Message not framed in actual printout.
6.6
Manual Entry of Position and Time
If there is no EPFS (Electronic Position-Fixing System) connected to this equipment or the
EPFS connected is not working (EPFS error indication appears), manually enter position
and time as follows:
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose POSITION.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
Position setup
**
**
Last updated: EPFS
LAT : 34 41.0000 N
LON : 135° 30.0000 E
TIME: 09: 00 UTC
“Last updated” shows the method used at the last time, EPFS, MANUAL or NO INFO
(information).
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
Note: If, when “Last updated” is EPFS, input from the navigator is interrupted, the message
“EPFS error” appears. If this occurs, check the navigator.
4. Push the ENTER knob to show the position method window, and then rotate the ENTER
knob to choose the EPFS, MANUAL or NO INFO.
5. Press the ENTER knob. Go to step 6 only when choosing MANUAL at step 4.
6. Push the ENTER knob to open the latitude input window. Use the numeric keys to enter
latitude. If necessary, switch coordinates: 1/RT/CH key to switch to North; 2/DSC key to
switch to South. Push the ENTER knob.
Position setup
**
**
Last up dated: MANUAL
LAT : 34° 4
30.1234 N
3
4
°
30.1234 N
3
3
4
°
NORTH: [1] KEY
SOUTH: [2] KEY
LON : 135°
After last digit
is entered
TIME: 09: 0
7. Push the ENTER knob to open the longitude input window. Use the numeric keys to
enter longitude. If necessary, switch coordinates: 1/RT/CH key to switch to East; 2/DSC
key to switch to West. Push the ENTER knob.
Position setup
**
**
Last up dated: MANUAL
LAT : 34° 30 NORTH
LAT: 34 41 NORTH
1
35
°30.1234 E
LON : 135° 30 EAST
1
35
°30.1234 E
EAST: [1] KEY
WEST: [2] KEY
TIME: 09
After last digit
is entered
8. Push the ENTER knob to open the time input window.
Position setup
Last up dated: MANUAL
LAT : 34°30.1234 N
LAT : 34 41 NORTH
LON : 135° 30.1234 E
LON
: 135˚ 30 EAST
TIME: 09C
12 : 34
9. Enter UTC time with the numeric keys and then push the ENTER knob.
10. Press the CANCEL key.
Note: When “Last updated” is MANUAL, the message “Warning: Update position” appears
at set intervals (update interval selected with POSITION OLDER on the Alarm menu)
to ask you to update position.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.7
Date and Time Setting
Set the date and time for the system.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose DATE/TIME.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
Date/Time setup
**
SOURCE: INTERNAL
DATE: 2008/02/29
TIME: 11:45 UTC
SOURCE: Choose INTERNAL or EPFS (using ZDA).
DATE: Enter the date for manual setting.
TIME: Enter time for manual setting.
4. Choose DATE, and push the ENTER knob.
5. Use the numeric keys to enter year/month/date, and push the ENTER knob.
6. The cursor chooses TIME; push the ENTER knob.
7. Use the numeric keys to enter the time, and push the ENTER knob.
6.8
Memory Clear
Logs, messages files and user channels in the memory can be cleared. Also, the settings
are able to restore to the default setting.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MEM CLR.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
Memory clear
**
RCVD ORDINARY LOG
RCVD DISTRESS LOG
TRANSMITTED LOG
MESSAGE FILES
USER CHANNELS
LOAD DEFAULT
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
Clearing received ordinary log
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose RCVD ORDINARY LOG.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
CLEAR
RCVD ORDINARY LOG.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and push the ENTER knob.
Clearing received distress log
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose RCVD DISTRESS LOG.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
CLEAR
RCVD DISTRESS LOG.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and push the ENTER knob.
Clearing transmitted log
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TRANSMITTED LOG.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
CLEAR
TRANSMITTED LOG.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and push the ENTER knob.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
Clearing message files
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MESSAGE FILES.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
CLEAR
MESSAGE FILES.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and push the ENTER knob.
Clearing user channels
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USER CHANNELS.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
CLEAR
USER CHANNELS.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and push the ENTER knob.
Restoring to default setting
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose LOAD DEFAULT.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
LOAD DEFAULT.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES
NO
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose YES, and push the ENTER knob.
6.9
Setting Alarms
The Alarm setup menu enables or disables the internal and external alarm beep. Note that
the receiving alarm beep for the distress and urgency cannot be disable.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ALARM, and push the ENTER knob.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
Default: ON
OFF
ON
Disables/enables alarm for received Safety and
Routine calls.
Rotate
ENTER
knob to choose.
****Alarm setup ***
Default: 4.0 hours
INTERNAL ALARM
POSITION OLDER
: OFF
:4.0 H
4.0
Alarm is output when position is older by the
number of hours set here.
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.5
EXT ALARM : DSTRS/URG
ALARM DISTANCE: 500 NM
Default: DSTRS/URG
Sets type of call to be output to the
IC-303.
DSTRS/URG
ROUTINE
ALL
Default: 500 NM
OFF
OFF
500 NM
DSTRS/URG: Distress or urgency
call output upon receipt.
Enable or disable reception of the
distress alarm received from a ship
in distress which is more than 500
miles from own ship.
ROUTINE:
Routine call output
upon receipt.
All calls output.
No output.
ALL:
OFF:
6.10 Sound Setting
The SOUND menu lets you set the volume for the following items:
•
•
•
Key click on/off
Volume of the receiving alarm for the safety and routine messages
Volume of the receiving alarm for the distress and urgency
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SOUND, and push the ENTER knob.
Turns on/off beep generated when
keyboard is operated.
Note: Do not confuse keyboard beep
(single beep) with ACK beep
(three beeps).
OFF
Default: ON
ON
Sound setup
***
***
Rotate ENTER knob
to set.
Sets loudness of Safety,
Routine and Old Position
alarms.
ORDINARY ALARM
VOLUME (0~63)
ꢀ
KEY CLICK
: ON
ORDINARY ALARM : 30
DISTRESS ALARM : 63
ꢁ
47
DISTRESS ALARM
VOLUME (38~63)
ꢀ
Rotate ENTER knob
to set.
ꢁ
63
Sets loudness of Distress and Urgency alarms.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.11 Setting the AUTO ACK Details
The acknowledgement message may be sent automatically when you receive a message
which requires acknowledgement. You can also enable or disable it for position, polling and
test messages. Note that the automatic acknowledge is automatically disabled when RX
call contains error, as required by law. Further, automatic acknowledge is disabled in case
of OFF HOOK.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Choose USR SETUP, and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose AUTO ACK, and push the ENTER knob.
Default: ABLE
Effective when 5/ACK/SQ key is set for "AUTO ACK."
UNABLE
ABLE: Sends ABLE acknowledge automatically.
ABLE
UNABLE: Sends UNABLE acknowledge automatically.
Note: Automatic acknowledge is automatically disabled
when RX call contains error, as required by law.
Further, automatic acknowledge is disabled in case of
OFF HOOK.
Default: NO REASON
Rotate ENTER
knob to choose
NO REASON
BUSY
EQUIP DISABLE
MODE NOT USABLE
CH NOT USABLE
**Auto ack setup **
COMPLY TYPE
UNABLE REASON :
NO REASON GIVEN
: ABLE
Sets reason for UNABLE.
POSITION MESSAGE: OFF
POLLING MESSAGE: ON
TEST MESSAGE: ON
Note: This menu is the same as manual
acknowledgement. EQUIPMENT
DISABLE is shown in calls when
EQUIP DISABLE is selected.
Default: OFF
Effective when 5/ACK/SQ key
is set for "AUTO ACK."
OFF
ON
OFF: Disables automatic
acknowledgement of
position request.
ON: Enables automatic
acknowledgement of
position request.
Default: ON
Default: ON
Effective when 5/ACK/SQ key
is set for "AUTO ACK."
OFF
Effective when 5/ACK/SQ key
is set for "AUTO ACK."
OFF: Disables automatic
acknowledgement of
test call.
OFF
ON
ON
OFF: Disables automatic
acknowledgement of
polling request.
ON: Enables automatic
acknowledgement of
polling request.
ON: Enables automatic
acknowledgement of
test call.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.12 Printing Messages
The Print Out menu enables/disables automatic printing of all transmitted and received calls
and the results of the daily test.
1. Press the SETUP key.
2. Choose USR SETUP and PRINT OUT in order, and push the ENTER knob to display
the Print out set up menu.
Default: MANUAL
Select AUTO to automatically print
transmitted calls.
AUTO
MANUAL
Print out setup
*
*
Default: MANUAL
XMIT MESSAGE: MANUAL
RCVD MESSAGE: MANUAL
DAILY TEST : MANUAL
Select AUTO to automatically print
received calls.
AUTO
MANUAL
Default: MANUAL
Select AUTO to automatically print
results of Daily Test.
AUTO
MANUAL
Sample printouts
Printing can be done automatically or manually. For manual printing, press the PRINT key.
Note that calls having more than one page (for example, received calls) are printed out in
their entirety.
Received message at JUN-08-2006-16:10:12
DISTRESS ALERT
*
*
Received message at JUN-08-2006-16:10:12
*
*
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
DESTINATION ID
SELF-IDENTITY
: 777777777
: 111111111
NATURE OF DISTRESS
DISTRESS COORDINATES
DISTRESS TELECOMMAND
END OF SEQUENCE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
ERROR-CHECK
: UNDESIGNATED DISTRESS
: NO INFORMATION
: TELEPHONE
PRIORITY
SELF-IDENTITY
: ROUTINE
: 987654321
: TELEPHONE
: NO INFORMATION
: NO INFORMATION
COMMUNICATION MODE
COMMUNICATION OPTION
WORKING FREQUENCY
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
ERROR-CHECK
: EOS
: OK
DSC FREQUENCY
TX: 2187.5 kHz
RX: 2187.5 kHz
: OK
DSC FREQUENCY
TX: 2177.0 kHz
RX: 2177.0 kHz
Sample Received Message Printout (Distress)
Sample Received Message Printout (Individual)
Transmitted message at JUN-08-2006-16:10:12 *
*
DISTRESS ALERT
Transmitted message at JUN-08-2006-16:10:12 *
*
INDIVIDUAL REQUEST
SELF-IDENTITY
: 111111111
DESTINATION ID
: 123456789
NATURE OF DISTRESS
DISTRESS COORDINATES
COMMUNICATION MODE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
: UNDESIGNATED DISTRESS
: NO INFORMATION
: TELEPHONE
PRIORITY
SELF-IDENTITY
COMMUNICATION MODE
COMMUNICATION OPTION
WORKING FREQUENCY
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT REQUIRED
: ROUTINE
: 111111111
: TELEPHONE
: NO INFORMATION
: NO INFORMATION
DSC FREQUENCY
TX: 2177.0 kHz
RX: 2177.0 kHz
DSC FREQUENCY
TX: 2177.0 kHz
RX: 2177.0 kHz
Sample Transmitted Message Printout (Distress) Sample Transmitted Message Printout (Individual)
Note: Messages are not framed in actual printouts.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.13 Setting Scan Frequencies
The Scan freq menu determines which DSC routine and distress frequencies to scan.
Follow the instructions below to select/deselect DSC routine and distress frequencies to
scan.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SCAN FREQ, and then push the ENTER knob to
display the Scan freq setup menu.
**Scan freq setup
*
ROUTINE
DISTRESS
2M : FIXED
4M : ON
F1 : 2M-INTL
F2 : 4M-INTL
F3 : 6M-INTL
F4 : 8M-INTL
F5 : 12M-INTL
F6 : 16M-INTL
6M : ON
8M : FIXED
12M : ON
16M : OFF
Distress and safety frequencies
1. Rotate the ENTER knob clockwise to shift the cursor to the DISTRESS column.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the frequency band and then push the ENTER knob.
For example, choose 4 MHz.
**Scan freq setup
*
ROUTINE
DISTRESS
2M :
F1 : 2M-INTL
F2 : 2M-INTL
F3 : 4M-INTL
F4 : 8M-INTL
F5 : 12M-INTL
F6 : 16M-INTL
OFF
ON
4M :
6M : ON
8M : FIXED
12M : ON
16M : OFF
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the
ENTER knob.
4. Press the CANCEL key three times to return to the radiotelephone screen.
Note:Regulations require that 2 MHz and 8 MHz and one more DSC distress frequency be
watched continuously. 2 MHz and 8 MHz cannot be turned off. Maximum three bands
may be turned off.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
Routine frequencies
1. Rotate the ENTER knob clockwise to shift the cursor to the ROUTINE column.
**Scan freq setup
*
ROUTINE
DISTRESS
2M : FIXED
4M : ON
F1 : 2M-INTL
F2 : 4M-INTL
F3 : 6M-INTL
F4 : 8M-INTL
F5 : 12M-INTL
F6 : 16M-INTL
6M : ON
8M : FIXED
12M : ON
16M : OFF
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose the frequency band. For example, choose F1.
**Scan freq setup
*
ROU
OFF
DISTRESS
2M : FIXED
4M : ON
F1 :
2 MHZ
F2 : 3
4 MHZ
F3 :
6 MHZ
6M : ON
F4 :
8M : FIXED
12M : ON
16M : OFF
8 MHZ
F5 : 1
ꢀ
F6 : 25M-LCL2
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose a frequency to set.
4. Push the ENTER knob, and the display looks something like the one below.
**Scan freq setup
*
ROUTINE
F
INTL : T 2189.5/R 2177.0
DISTRESS
D
F
DIST : T2187.5/R 2187.5
F
F
F
F6 : 25M-LCL2
D
16M : OFF
User channel appears if registered.
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose frequency desired and then push the ENTER knob.
INTL:
DIST:
International channels
Distress channels
LOCAL1/LOCAL2: Local channels
USER: User channel
6. Press the CANCEL key three times to return to the radiotelephone screen.
Note:Distress frequencies can be stored on the routine frequency memory. This is
convenient for backing up the watch-keeping receiver.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.14 Key Assignment
The 8/PRINT key can function as a short-key, providing quick access to a function without
opening the menu. You can program one of the functions listed below, and the default
setting is NONE (shortcut function is disabled).
•
•
•
•
NONE: Not assigned any function.
NB: Noise blanker on/off
TONE: Transmit/stop the tone signal.
SDUP/DUP: Changes the communication mode on the duplex channel (FS-5070 only)
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose KEY ASSIGN, and push the ENTER knob.
Key assign setup
PRINT KEY: NONE
4. Push the ENTER knob.
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose NONE, NB, TONE or SDUP/DUP as appropriate.
6. Push the ENTER knob.
6.15 Special Messages
Permission to transmit NEWTRAL CRAFT and MEDICAL TRANSPORT can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose SPECIAL MSG, and push the ENTER knob to show
the following menu.
Special Msg Setup
MSG
MSG
4. Choose NEUTRAL MSG or MEDICAL MSG, and then push the ENTER knob.
UNABLE
5. Choose ABLE or UNABLE as appropriate, and then push the ENTER knob.
6. Press the CANCEL key to return to the radiotelephone screen.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
6.16 FAX Enable/Disable
You may enable or disable FAX use as follows. This setting is necessary when the facsimile
is connected and used to receive.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP, and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose FAX Rx and then push the ENTER knob.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ENABLE or DISABLE as appropriate and then push
the ENTER knob.
When choosing ENABLE, “FAX” is added to the emission mode.
CH:
200
Tx: 2182.0 kHz
Rx: 2182.00 kHz
Emission mode
P HIGH FAST NB SQ
SSB
S
TLX
FAX
10.0A
xxxxx
AM
UTC 00:00
EPFS 23:59
35 00.0000N
135 00.0000E
5. Press the CANCEL key twice return to the radiotelephone screen.
6.17 Speaker Setting in Off Hook
When the handset is off hook, you may choose to turn the speaker (panel speaker or
external speaker) on or off. The default setting is OFF, which turns off the speaker when the
handset is off hook. The ON position keeps the speaker on always, regardless of handset
state.
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose HOOK SP OFF, push the ENTER knob.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose ON or OFF as appropriate, and push the ENTER
key.
6.18 Operation Timer Off
When the screen which cannot receive the DSC message is active more than 10 minutes
without any operation, the control unit returns to the radiotelephone screen automatically.
You can enable/disable this function as below:
1. Press the #/SETUP key.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose USR SETUP and push the ENTER knob.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TIMER, push the ENTER knob.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose 10MIN or OFF as appropriate, and push the ENTER
knob.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. MENU OPERATION
This page is intentionally left blank.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7.1
Turning on the NBDP System
Turn on the terminal unit and the printer with their respective power switches.
Brilliance, Contrast control
Operating Lamp
Floppy Disk Drive
POWER Switch
Operating Lamp
POWER Switch
TERMINAL UNIT IB-581
Floppy Disk Drive
TERMINAL UNIT IB-583
Insert
Delete
Prt Sc
SysRq
Scroll
Lock
Pause
Break
Num
Lock
Esc
F1
F11
F4
F2
F12
F3
F7
F9
F10
F5
F6
C
F8
~
!
@
#
$
%
5
^
&
7
7
*
8
(
9
I
9
)
*
_
-
+
=
Backspace
2
3
4
`
1
6
8
0
Tab
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
4
5
O
6
P
{
}
]
|
\
[
Caps Lock
Shift
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
1
K
2
L
3
:
+
"
Enter
;
'
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
0
<
>
?
/
/
Shift
,
.
PgUp
Ctrl
Alt
Ctrl
Alt
Fn
Home
End
PgDn
POWER
Switch
PRINTER PP-510
KEYBOARD
NBDP terminal unit, printer and keyboard
Note 1: The Printer PP-510 prints messages. Refer to its operator’s manual for operating
information.
Note 2: When the NBDP has priority, the control unit displays “OCCUPIED (NBDP) ”.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7.2
Description of Equipment
7.2.1
Terminal unit
The terminal unit is a visual display incorporating a floppy disk drive, which provides for
storage of files on floppy disks. Two models are available, IB-581 (monochrome) and IB-583
(color). Controls for power and adjustment of display brilliance and contrast are provided on
the front panel of the IB-581. To adjust the brilliance on the IB-583, press Alt while pressing
F6 to lower the brilliance; F7 to raise it. (The IB-583 does not have a control for adjustment
of contrast.) Eight levels of brilliance are available.
When the terminal unit is turned on, the communication status display, shown below,
appears. This is where all phases of telex communications begin.
1:File 2:Edit 3:Operate 4:Window 5:Station 6:System 7:WRU 8:HR 9:Over 10:Break
2002-10-15 2:26:45 UTC
Caps-Eng
Station Name
Frequency (T/R) :
Comm Status
:
. /
. (kHz) Comm Mode : AUTO
: Connect Send Lock Error
Sending Volume :
(%) ARQ Error : 0 ARQ Time : 0(sec)
Communication status display
Features of the IB-583
The IB-583 is fitted with both English and Russian interface. Choose desired interface as
below:
English: Turn on the IB-583 while pressing the E key.
Russian: Turn on the IB-583 while pressing the R key.
The IB-583 has a battery (type CR2450-F2ST2L, code no. 000-144-941) on its TERM/CPU
Board (16P0209) and its life is about six years. When the voltage of the battery is low, the
time will be slow. When this occurs, contact your dealer about replacement of the battery.
Note: To switch between Russian and English input, press Alt while holding down Shift.
(This is available in Russian mode only.)
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7.2.2
Keyboard
The terminal unit is operated from the keyboard, and is almost 100% keyboard controlled.
Operation is simplified by the use of menus which you access by pressing a function key,
labeled F1-F10 at the top of the keyboard. The figure below shows the function menus and
their corresponding function keys.
FILE EDIT OPERATE WINDOW STATION SYSTEM WRU HR OVER BREAK
Insert
Delete
Prt Sc
SysRq
Scroll
Lock
Pause
Break
Num
Lock
Esc
F1
F11
F4
F2
F3
F7
F9
F10
F5
F6
F8
F12
~
!
@
#
$
%
5
^
&
7
*
8
(
9
I
9
)
*
_
-
+
=
Backspace
C
2
3
4
`
1
6
7
8
0
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
4
5
O
6
P
{
}
]
|
\
Tab
[
Caps Lock
Shift
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
1
K
2
L
3
:
+
"
Enter
;
'
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
0
<
>
?
/
/
Shift
,
.
PgUp
Ctrl
Alt
Ctrl
Alt
Fn
Home
End
PgDn
Keyboard
%
5
C
Note:
(Euro mark) on
key is not used.
C
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7.3
Function Keys, Menu Operation
The function keys at the top of the keyboard control most operations of this unit through a
menu system.
7.3.1
Menu conventions
Inverse video
As you move the cursor down through a menu, a selected item, initially shown as white on
black (monochrome display), inverses to black on white. This highlighting indicates that it is
available for selection.
Underline
The underline shows current selection. In the figure below, for example, the underline is
beneath “ARQ” and “Channel.”
Station Entry
Station List
Create
Change
Station Set Up
Station :
ID Code :
Mode
: ARQ FEC
CH/Table : Channel ScanTable
Num/Table:
Underline
Inverse Video
Station entry screen
Note: The example display screen shown in this manual are taken from the IB-583. The
screens of the IB-581 are nearly identical to those of the IB-583 except cursor
configuration.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7.3.2
Menu overview
Selecting menus
Press appropriate function key to open a menu. To display the File menu, for example,
press the function key F1.
File
1: New
2: Open
3: Close
4: Delete
5: Rename
6: Real Time Printing
7: File to Print
8: Cancel Printing
9: Clear Buffer
0: Floppy Disk Format
File menu
Selecting menu items and options
Menu items can be selected by pressing appropriate numeric key or selecting item desired
with the arrow keys and pressing the Enter key. Menu options can be selected by operating
the ← or → keys. After selecting option desired, press the Enter key to register your
selection and close the menu.
Closing menu
Press the ESC key several times. To open the menu, press the function key to use.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
7.3.3
Function key description
Function key [F1]: File menu
The File menu is where you will create, open, save and print telex messages. Floppy disks
are also formatted from this menu.
File
1: New
2: Open
3: Close
4: Delete
5: Rename
6: Real Time Printing
7: File to Print
8: Cancel Printing
9: Clear Buffer
0: Floppy Disk Format
File menu
1: New
Opens a new untitled window.
Opens files.
2: Open
3: Close
Closes files.
4: Delete
Deletes files.
5: Rename
Renames files.
6: Real Time Printing
7: File to Print
8: Cancel Printing
9: Clear Buffer
0: Floppy Disk Format
Turns real time printing on/off.
Prints files.
Stops printing.
Clears the communications buffer.
Formats a floppy disk.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Function key [F2]: Edit menu
The Edit menu provides a full line of editing features.
Edit
1: Undo
2: Cut
3: Copy
4: Paste
5: Select All
6: Search
7: Replace
8: Goto Top
9: Goto Bottom
0: Goto Line
A: Change Text
Edit menu
1: Undo
2: Cut
Cancels the last change (cut, copy or paste).
Removes the selected text and stores it in the paste buffer. (Previous
text in the paste buffer is cleared.)
3: Copy
4: Paste
Copies the selected text and stores it in the paste buffer. (Previous text
in the paste buffer is cleared.)
Inserts the text stored in the paste buffer at the current location of the
cursor.
5: Select All
6: Search
Selects the entire current file for cut or copy.
Searches a file for a character string.
7: Replace
8: Goto Top
Replaces a word with a different word or character string.
Brings the cursor to the top line of the current file.
9: Goto Bottom Brings the cursor to last line of the current file.
0: Goto Line Moves the cursor to the desired line in the current file.
A: Change Text Switches between the display window 1 and 2.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Function key [F3]: Operate menu
The Operate menu mainly controls transmitting and receiving.
Operate
1: Call Station
2: Macro Operation
3: File to Send
4: Cancel Sending
5: Scan (Start/Stop)
6: Manual Reception
7: Timer Operation
8: Manual Calling
9: Set Frequency
Operate menu
1: Call Station
Chooses a station from the station list.
Enables macro operation. For details, see paragraph 10.10.
Selects a file (to transmit).
2: Macro Operation
3: File to Send
4: Cancel Sending
5: Scan Start/Stop
6: Manual Reception
Stops sending a file.
Starts/stops frequency scanning.
Selects communication mode for reception; AUTO, ARQ, FEC
DIRC.
7: Timer Operation
8: Manual Calling
9: Set Frequency
Timer programming.
Sets TX mode and subscriber’s ID number in manual calling.
Sets TX and RX frequencies in manual calling.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Function key [F4]: Window menu
The Window menu lets you display the corresponding data of the window below.
Window
1: Calendar
2: Distress Frequency Table
Window menu
1: Calendar
Displays desired calendar month and year. To change year
or month, choose item with ↑ or ↓ key and change setting
with ← or → key.
2: Distress Frequency Table Displays all distress frequencies.
Distress Frequencies
Telephone (kHz): 2182.0 4125.0 6215.0 8291.0 12290.0 16420.0
NBDP
DSC
(kHz) : 2174.5 4177.5 6268.0 8376.5 12520.0 16695.0
(kHz) : 2187.5 4207.5 6312.0 8414.5 12577.0 16804.5
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Function key [F5]: Station menu
The Station menu provides for storage of stations, timer program setup, user channel setup,
and entry of various ID codes.
Station
1: Station Entry
2: Timer Operation Entry
3: Scan Entry
4: User Channel Entry
5: Answerback Code Entry
6: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit)
7: Group ID Entry (9 digit)
8: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit)
9: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
Station menu
1: Station Entry
Registers stations.
2: Timer Operation Entry
3: Scan Entry
Registers timer programs.
Creates scan groups for scanning.
Registers user channels.
4: User Channel Entry
5: Answerback Code Entry Registers own ship’s answerback code.
6: Group ID Entry
7: Group ID Entry
8: Select ID Entry
9: Select ID Entry
Registers own ship’s group ID codes (4 or 5 digit).
Registers own ship’s group ID codes (9 digit).
Registers own ship’s selective ID codes (4 or 5 digit).
Registers own ship’s selective ID codes (9 digit).
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Function key [F6]: System menu
The System menu is mainly for use by technicians and contains diagnostic tests. To change
settings, choose “Change” from the item “Setup” and operate arrow keys to choose item
and option. Press the Enter key to register selection and close the menu.
System
Setup
Lock Change Default
Slave Delay
8 msec (0- 50 msec)
TX/RX MSG Save
Edit Before sending
OFF O N
OFF O N
Time System
Time & Date
Window Color*
Self Test
OFF UTC SMT JST
2002/10/16 10:00:00
*: Display mode" shown on IB-581
System menu
Setup
Locks, changes settings; restores default system settings.
Slave Delay
Sets the length of the slave delay timing from the end of RX to
the start of TX in the ARQ mode. The default setting is suitable in
most cases. This item cannot be adjusted by the user.
3 char. RX
3 char. RX
ARQ mode
signal
sequence
Slave Delay Timing
RX end TX start
ACK signal
TX/RX MSG Save
Turn on to automatically save incoming and outgoing messages to
a floppy disk. “Log” appears at the top of the screen when on.
Edit Before sending
“OFF” transmits keying operation one by one. “ON” transmits
message only when the Enter key is pressed after confirming text
typed.
Time System
Time & Date
Chooses time system.
UTC: Coordinated universal time
SMT: Local time
JST: Japan standard time.
Enter date and time manually. If a navigation device is connected,
the time is automatically set when the power is turned on or
whenever the time system is switched. Manual entry takes priority
over automatic entry. This item cannot be adjusted when using
JST or UTC.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. NBDP SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Window Color (IB-583) Chooses display colors. To change display colors:
1. Choose the option Change from Setup.
2. Press the ↓ key to choose Window Color and press the Enter
key.
Window Color Change
Window Color Setup
Default Color
To Change: ENTER To quit: ESC
3. The cursor is choosing Window Color Setup; press the Enter
key.
Window Color Setup
Window
: [BASE WINDOW ]
Fore Color : [L-WHITE
Back Color : [BLUE
]
]
To Change: ENTER To Change Value: L<=>R
4. Press the → key to choose the item to change: BASE
WINDOW, BACK SCROLL, EDIT 1-2, FUNCTION, SUB MENU
1-3, MESSAGE.
5. Press the ↓ key to choose Fore Color.
6. Press the → key to choose color: L-WHITE, BLACK, BLUE,
GREEN, CYAN, RED, MAGENTA, BROWN, WHITE, GRAY,
L-BLUE, L-GREEN, L-CYAN, L-RED, L-MAGENTA, YELLOW.
7. Press the ↓ key to choose Back Color.
8. Press the → key to choose color.
9. Press the ↑ key to choose Window.
10. Repeat the step 4 to 9 to set other colors.
11. Press the Enter key followed by the Esc key.
Display Mode (IB-581) Selects display mode to normal and reverse alternately.
Self Test: Starts diagnostic test.
Function key [F7]: WRU (Who Are You?): In the ARQ mode, requests other station’s
answerback code.
Function key [F8]: HR (Here Is): In the ARQ mode, sends your ship’s answerback code.
Function key [F9]: OVER: In the ARQ mode, switches the direction of traffic; the
information receiving station becomes the information sending station, the information
sending station becomes the information receiving station.
Function key [F10]: Break: Disconnects the line.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
This chapter provides the procedures necessary for preparing the NBDP Terminal Unit for
transmitting and receiving. For automatic telex, you will need to register the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Your ship’s ID and answerback codes
Stations
Timer programs
Scan channel groups
User channels
8.1
Registering Answerback Code & ID Codes
Enter your ship’s answerback code and ID codes as shown below.
Note:The answerback and ID codes cannot be changed once entered; be sure to enter the
codes correctly.
8.1.1
Registering answerback code
1. Press the function key F5 and then the 5 key. The display should look something like the
illustration below.
Answerback Code Entry
Answerback Code
_
Answerback code entry screen
2. Enter your ship’s answerback code (max. 20 characters, including spaces) and press
the Enter key. The prompt “OK/Cancel” asks for verification of data. If the code is correct,
press the Enter key again.
Note: Example of answerback code: 123456789 FURU X.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
For final verification of the data, the Caution shown in the illustration below appears.
Answerback Code Entry
Answerback Code
O K
123456789 FURU X
Cancel
Caution
Confirm the 'CODE' before pressing ENTER key.
You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.
Message for confirmation of code entered
3. If the code is correct, press the Enter key again.
8.1.2
Registering ID codes
1. Press function key F5 and then the 6, 7, 8 or 9 key to enter the Group ID Code (4 or 5
digits), Group ID Code (9 digits), Select ID Code (4 or 5 digits) or Select ID Code (9
digits), respectively.
Select ID Entry
Select ID Code (4/5)
_
ID code entry screen
2. Enter Group ID or Select ID as appropriate and then press the Enter key. A prompt asks
you to verify data. If the ID is correct, press the Enter key.
For final verification of the data, the Caution shown in the illustration below appears.
Select ID Entry
Select ID Code (4/5)
12345
O K
Cancel
Caution
Confirm the 'CODE' before pressing ENTER key.
You cannot change the CODE once it has been entered.
Message for confirmation of code entered
3. If the ID is correct, press the Enter key again.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
8.2
Station List
The station list provides for storage of up to 50 stations, one frequency pair (RX and TX) per
station. For stations which have more than one frequency pair, you might add a suffix to the
station name to denote multiple frequency pairs. For example, station name FURUNO
followed by –1, -2, -3, etc. for each frequency pair required.
8.2.1
Registering stations
1. Press the function key F5 followed by the 1 key to show the Station Entry screen.
Station Entry
Station List
Create
Change
Station Set Up
Station :
ID Code :
Mode
: ARQ FEC
CH/Table : Channel ScanTable
Num/Table:
Station entry screen
On the right-hand side of the screen, Create and Change are shown.
2. Create should be underlined. If it is not, underline it by pressing →, ↑ and the Enter key.
3. The cursor is now choosing Station. Enter station name, using up to 18 characters.
4. Press the ↓ key to choose ID Code. Enter station ID code.
5. Press the ↓ key to choose Mode. Choose communication mode with ← or → among the
following:
ARQ: Automatic Retransmission Request
FEC: Forward Error Correction
6. Press the ↓ key to choose CH/Table. Choose Channel or ScanTable as appropriate.
7. Press the ↓ key to choose Num/Table.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
8. If you selected “Channel” at step 6, enter ITU channel number (see Appendix) or User
channel number.
9. If you selected “ScanTable” at step 6, press the → key to show scan group list
registered. For scan group, refer to paragraph 8.5.
10. Choose a scan group name by using the ↓ or ↑ key followed by pressing the Enter key.
Scanning Group List
INTREPID
VOYAGER
GLOBAL
▼
Scanning group list
11. Press the Enter key. The prompt OK/Cancel asks for verification of data.
O K
Cancel
OK/Cancel prompt
12.If the data are correct, press the Enter key. (To cancel entry, place the cursor on Cancel
by pressing the ↓ key, and then hit the Enter key. Data entered are erased.) The station
name entered at step 3 appears at the Station List window.
13.To register other stations, press the Enter key twice and then repeat steps 3 through 10.
14.Press the ↓ key. Check data on the Station List for correctness. Stations displayed in
reverse video on the Station List are displayed on Station Set Up.
15.Press the ESC key to quit.
Note 1: If you enter a station which already exists, the indication “Station by that
name already exists. Press any key to escape.” Appears. Press any key
to return to the Station List. Check the list.
Note 2: If you enter an invalid code, the message “Input Error. (ID Code) Press
any key to escape.” Appears. Press any key and reenter ID code.
8.2.2
Editing/Deleting stations
1. Press the function key F5 and then the 1 key.
2. Press the ↓ key to choose a station name from the Station List.
3. Press the → key followed by ↓ key to choose Change and press the Enter key.
4. Do one of the following;
Edit station:
Use ↑, ↓ and the Backspace key to make corrections.
Delete station: Erase station name with the Backspace key.
5. Press the Enter key twice.
6. Press the Esc key.
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
8.3
Timer Programming
A built-in timer allows you to automatically receive and transmit files. 10 timer programs can
be registered. To enable timer operation, see section 10-6.
8.3.1
Registering timer programs
1. Press the function key F5 and the 2 key to display the Timer Operation Entry screen.
Timer Operation Entry
Timer Operation List
Create
Change
Timer Operation Set Up
Operation
Station
: _
:
Start Time
Stop Time
: 0: 00: 00
: 0: 00: 00
Receive/Send : Receive Send
File to Send :
Press [→] to show station list, file list.
Timer operation entry screen
2. If Create is not underlined, press →, ↑ and the Enter key to underline it.
3. Operation is selected. Enter a suitable operation name on the Operation line. Any
alphanumeric characters may be used.
Note:If the operation name entered already exists, the display “Operation
name already exists. Press any key to escape.” Press any key and
change the operation name.
4. Press the ↓ key to choose Station.
5. Press the → key to display the Station List (which you registered stations in the previous
paragraph.)
6. Choose a station and press the Enter key.
7. Press the ↓ key to choose Start Time. Enter start time, in 24-hour notation. To have the
operation start at 8:35 a. m., for example, the keying sequence would be;
0
8
3
5
0
0
8. Press the ↓ key to choose Stop Time. Enter stop time, in 24-hour notation.
9. Press the ↓ key to choose Receive/Send. Choose operation category; Receive or Send.
If you have chosen “Send,” go to step 10. For “Receive,” go to step 12.
10.For send, insert the floppy disk which you want to send in the floppy drive, press the ↓
key to choose File to Send.
11. Press the → key to display the TX window, choose a file, and press the Enter key twice.
12.Press the Enter key.
13.Press the Enter key. The operation name appears in the Timer Operation List.
14.To enter another timer program, press the Enter key twice and the repeat steps 3-11.
15.Press the Esc key to finish.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
8.3.2
Editing/Deleting timer programs
1. Press the function key F5 and the 2 key.
2. Choose a timer program name from the Timer Operation List.
3. Press the → key to choose Change and press the Enter key.
4. Do one of the following;
Edit program:
Use ↑, ↓ and the Backspace key to make corrections.
Delete program: Erase operation name with the Backspace key.
5. Press the Enter key twice.
6. Press the Esc key.
8.4
User Channels
The user channel list provides storage for up to 100 user channels, numbered 0-99. Note
that user channels may be used in channel scanning.
8.4.1
Registering user channels
1. Press the function key F5 and then the 4 key to show the User Channel Entry screen.
User Channel Entry
Channel List
Create
Change
Channel Set Up
Channel : _
Tx Freq :
Rx Freq :
0.00
0.00
User channel entry screen
2. If Create is not underlined, press →, ↑ and the Enter key to underline it.
3. Channel is selected. Enter channel number.
Note 1: 100 channels may be registered. When you attempt to register more, the
message “Channel memory is full. Press any key to escape.” Appears. In this case
delete unnecessary channels to register new ones.)
Note 2: If the channel entered already exists, the message “Channel by that number
already exists. Press any key to escape.” Appears. Press any key and then reenter
number.
4. Press the ↓ key to choose “Tx Freq.” Enter TX frequency.
5. Press the ↓ key to choose “Rx Freq.” Enter RX frequency.
6. Press the Enter key. The ”OK/Cancel” confirmation window appears.
7. Press the Enter key. Channel number entered appears in the Channel List.
8. To quit, press the Esc key.
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
8.4.2
Editing/Deleting user channels
1. Press function key F5 and then the 4 key.
2. Press the ↑ or ↓ key to choose channel from the Channel List.
3. Press ↓ and → keys to choose Change and press the Enter key.
4. Do one of the following:
Edit channel:
Use ↑, ↓ and the Backspace key to make modifications.
Delete channel: Erase channel number with the Backspace key.
5. Press the Enter key twice.
6. Press the Esc key.
8.5
Scan Channel Groups
You may store up to 10 scan groups, 20 channels per group. Note that scanning is only
possible in the ARQ and FEC modes.
The NBDP Terminal Unit can control radio equipment through channel scanning. In FEC
mode, the radio equipment scans a number of channels (according to your selection),
stopping when an incoming signal is found. In the ARQ mode it stops when your own ID
code is detected in an incoming signal. Also, in the ARQ mode, the transmitter is then tuned
to the corresponding transmitter frequency, the communication link is established and the
traffic is automatically exchanged. Scanning resumes once the link is disconnected.
8.5.1
Registering scan channel groups
You may register ITU and user scan channels as follows:
1. Press the function key F5 followed by the 3 key to display the Scan Entry screen.
Scan Entry
Scanning Group List
Create
Change
Scanning Set Up
Group Name
:
Ch Dwell Time : 4.5 sec (2.7-4.5 sec)
Mode
Auto Search
: AUTO ARQ FEC
: OFF ON
Pass/Scan
Pass/Scan
Pass/Scan
Pass/Scan
Pass/Scan
Pass/Scan
No
0
1
2
3
Channel
Rx Freq
Tx Freq
4
▼ 5
Scan entry screen
2. If Create is not underlined, press →, ↓ and the Enter key to underline it.
3. Group Name is selected. Enter suitable group name. (10 group names may be entered.
If you attempt to enter more the message “Scan group memory is full. Press any key to
escape.” Appears. Press any key and then delete unnecessary group names to enter
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. NBDP PREPARATIONS
new ones. If the group name already exists, the message “Scan group by that name
already exists. Press any key to escape.” Appears. Press any key and change the scan
group name.)
4. Press the ↓ key to choose Ch Dwell Time. Enter channel dwell time in seconds. Dwell
time is the time in seconds the receiver waits on each channel in a scan group before it
selects the next frequency.
5. Press the ↓ key to choose Mode, and then choose the communication mode; AUTO,
ARQ or FEC.
Note:AUTO is used to register scanning channel group when both ARQ and FEC exist
in the same Scanning Channel Group. When you choose scan group by the call
station menu, set Mode to FEC. See paragraph 10.3.
6. Press the ↓ key to choose Auto Search. Choose Auto Search to ON or OFF.
Auto Search ON: The radio stops scanning when it finds the strongest signal (highest
S/N ratio). To find the strongest signal, the radio scans all channels,
which may take some time. Therefore, use this setting where signal
propagation is poor.
Auto Search OFF: The radio stops scanning on the first signal it finds. We recommend
that you set Auto Search to OFF when signal propagation is good.
7. Press the ↓ key to choose line no. 1 in the Scanning Set Up window.
8. Enter channel number (ITU or user channels) and press the → key to choose “Scan.” (If
you enter an invalid channel, the message “ Channel by that number does not exist.
Press any key to escape.” Appears. Press any key and reenter channel.)
9. Press the ↓ key to choose line No. 2. Enter channel number.
10.Enter other channel numbers and then press the Enter key. A confirmation message
appears.
11. Press the Enter key again to save the data. The group name is displayed in the
Scanning Group List window.
12.To continue, press the Enter key twice and then repeat steps 3-10.
13.Press the Esc key to quit.
8.5.2
Editing/Deleting scan channel groups
1. Press the function key F5 and the 3 key.
2. Choose scan group name from the Scanning Group List.
3. Press the → key to choose Change and press the Enter key.
4. Press the ↓ key to place the cursor on the field (channel) to change.
5. Do one of the following:
Editing channels: Press the Backspace key to delete the channel number and then enter
new channel number.
Adding channels: Enter channel number on a blank line.
Deleting scan group: Delete group name with the Backspace key.
Disabling channels temporarily: Press the ← key to underline Pass.
6. Press the Enter key twice.
7. Press the ESC key.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
This chapter mainly describes how to create, save, open, edit and print files. The Edit menu
provides a full lineup of editing facilities, including search and replace.
9.1
Opening and Closing Files
To create a telex message you will need to make a new file, which you do with the File
Open command. When you open a new file it is placed (opened) in one of two working
areas. When both working areas are occupied you must close a file to open a new file. This
is done with the File Close command.
Floppy Disk Memory
File 1
1
One of
Display
two
2
File 2
File 3
Display Unit's
Memory
(Working area)
Switchable from
"Change Text" on
Edit menu
How a file is opened
9.2
Creating Files
1. Press the function key F1 to display the File menu.
File
1: New
2: Open
3: Close
4: Delete
5: Rename
6: Real Time Printing
7: File to Print
8: Cancel Printing
9: Clear Buffer
0: Floppy Disk Format
File menu
2. Press the 1 key to choose New. The title bar shows UNTITLED 1 or UNTITLED 2. The
cursor marks the location where you may type text.
3. Type your message.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
Note: Do not use lower case letters, or the symbols #, &, *, $ and % in telex messages.
Also, do not put “$$$” in the middle of a TX message, but at the end. The
communication line is automatically disconnected when this string is detected.
9.3
Saving a File
Use only 2HD type floppy disks. Insert floppy disk with care. Rough handling can destroy
the information stored inside. To eject a disk, press the eject button on the right side of the
floppy disk drive and then remove the disk. Do not eject a disk while the operating lamp is
lit; the contents of the disk may become damaged.
Hole opened: Write protect
Write-protect Tab
Write-Protect Tab
9.3.1
Formatting floppy disks
Before you can save a file to a floppy disk, the disk must be formatted. Formatting prepares
the disk for use in the system.
1. Press function key F1, and insert a new floppy disk in the disk drive.
2. Press the 0 key to choose Floppy Disk Format.
3. Press the ↑ key to choose Yes.
4. Press the Enter key. For the IB-581, insert a new floppy disk in the drive
5. Press the Enter key. For the IB-583, the screen shows formatting progress as below.
Floppy Disk Format
9%
6. After formatting has been completed, the following occurs;
IB-581: You are asked “Format another (Y/N)?” Press N and Enter to quite.
IB-583: Control is returned to the standby screen.
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
9.3.2
Saving a file
1. Press the function key F1 to display the File menu.
2. Press the 3 key. The screen should look something like the illustration at right.
Close Text
Save file ?
Yes
( UNTITLED1 )
No
Close text screen
3. Yes is selected; press the Enter key.
4. Enter file name, using up to eight characters.
You may use any alphabet or numeric on the keyboard. But you may not use the symbols
shown below. You may add an extension at the end of the file name, for example, .TXT, to
distinguish text files from macro files.
!
| : " > < ;
5. Press the Enter key.
9.4
Editing Files
9.4.1
Cutting and pasting text
You can delete, move and copy text by using the Cut, Copy and Paste functions in the Edit
menu.
Edit
1: Undo
2: Cut
3: Copy
4: Paste
5: Select All
6: Search
7: Replace
8: Goto Top
9: Goto Bottom
0: Goto Line
A: Change Text
Edit menu
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
Cutting text
1. Place the cursor on the first character of the text to be cut.
2. Highlight the text to be cut by pressing and holding the Shift key while pressing the →. If
you highlight text which you do not want to cut, press the ← to adjust the highlight.
<[1]UNTITLED1>
CONGULATULATION ON YOUR CHOICE OF DP-6
INMARSAT B MOBILE EARTH STATION.
WE ARE CONFIDENT THAT YOU WILL ENJOY MANY YEARS OF
OPERATION WITH THIS FINE PIECE OF EQUIPMENT
The highlight
3. Press the function key F2 and the 2 key, or the Delete key. The highlighted text is cut
and the remaining text is reformatted.
If you make a mistake, you can restore the text by immediately selecting Undo from the Edit
menu.
Pasting text
To paste the cut text to a new location, do the following:
1. Place the cursor at the exact spot in the message where the cut text is to start.
2. Press the function key F2 and the 4 key, or the Insert key.
9.4.2
Copying and pasting text
You may copy a portion of text and paste it elsewhere.
1. Choose the text to copy. (See “cutting text” above for the procedure.)
2. Press the function key F2 and the 3 key.
The text selected is copied to the paste buffer memory where the cut or copied text is stored.
The display returns to the normal screen.
3. Place the cursor at the exact spot in the message where the copied text is to start.
4. Press the function key F2 and the 4 key.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
9.4.3
Select all
The Select All feature lets you select all of the file currently displayed. This feature can be
useful when you want to combine files. The procedure below explains how to place the file
loaded in working area 1 onto the end of the file loaded in working area 2.
1. Load the file to be copied from a floppy disk in working area 1.
2. Press the function key F2 and the 5 key. The entire file appears in inverse video.
3. Press the function key F2 and the 3 key. The file is placed in the paste buffer memory.
4. Load the file to be combined in working area 2.
5. Place the cursor at the exact spot in the message where the text now in the paste buffer
memory is to start and press the Insert key.
Paste
Buffer
Memory
2
Working
Area 1
Holds cut or
copied text
Transfer
(copy)
Open
file
1
3
Floppy
Disk
Open
file
Working
Area 2
Paste (Combine)
4
Copy and paste flow diagram
9.4.4
Searching text
The Search feature lets you search for text in a forward or backward direction.
1. Display a text and press the function key F2 and the 6 key. The Search display appears.
Search
Dir
Forward
Search string :
Backward
ESC: Quit
Search screen
2. Type the word you want to find. Press the → key. Use ↑ or ↓ to choose “Forward” or
“Backward” to search the file in a forward or backward direction respectively from the
cursor position. Press the Enter key to begin the search.
When the unit finds the word, the cursor stops at the first character of the word. Press the
Enter key to continue the search. If the string could not be found, the message “Not Found
(To quit: ESC)” appears. Press the Esc key to quit.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
9.4.5
Replacing text
The Replace feature helps you replace every occurrence of a word or phase with another
word or phase in a file.
1. Press the function key F2 and the 7 key. The Replace display appears.
Replace
Mode
Dir
Search string :
Replace with :
Query
Forward
Forward
---------------
Backward
All
To quit: ESC
Replace screen
2. Type the word you want to replace on the “Search string” line.
3. Press the ↓ key to choose “Replace with.” Type the new word.
4. Press the → key.
5. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to choose Forward or Backward to search the file in a forward or
backward direction respectively from the cursor position.
6. Press the → key.
7. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to choose whether you want to be queried or not each time the word
is found.
Query: Stop at each occurrence of word to answer yes or no to replacement.
All:
Replace every occurrence of word without stopping to confirm.
8. Press the Enter key to start the replacement.
9.4.6
Goto line
The Goto line feature places the cursor at the head of a line desired.
1. Press the function key F2 and the 0 key. The following display appears.
Goto Line
Jump to Line No. :
Goto line screen
2. Key in line number and press the Enter key. The cursor shifts to the head of the line
selected.
9.4.7
Goto top, Goto bottom
You can easily go to the top or bottom line of a file. Press F2, 8 to go to the top line; press
F2, 9 to go to the bottom line. Note that this feature can also be executed on the editor
screen by pressing the Home or End key while pressing the Fn key.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
9.5
Opening Files
Two working areas (called working area 1 and working area 2) are provided to which you
can load a file, and one file may be displayed on the LCD.
9.5.1
Opening a file
1. Insert the floppy disk which contains the file you want to open.
2. Press the function key F1 to display the File menu.
3. Press the 2 key. A chronological list of files on the floppy disk appears.
Open Text
Load/Merge(TAB:Change)
[A:\TEST1.
File name
LOG File
TEST1.
TEST2.
TEST3.
NBDP
]
Size
52
120
151
180
169
Date & Time
02-10-15 17:25
02-10-15 16:30
02-10-15 9:25
02-10-15 20:16
02-10-15 6:23
[
End of Directory
]
4 Files exist
1454000 bytes free
To select : ENTER To view : SPACE To quit : ESC
4. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to choose a file.
5. Press the Enter key.
The file appears and the title bar shows the file name. You may repeat this procedure to
load another file into a working area.
Note:When two working areas have been opened, the close confirmation window appears.
In this case, choose Yes or No and press the Enter key to close an open file in order
to open another file.
9.5.2
Switching between files
Two files can be opened and one displayed on the LCD. To switch between files do the
following:
1. Press the function key F2.
2. Press the A key to switch between files.
9.6
Renaming Files
To rename a file, do the following:
1. Press the function key F1.
2. Press the 5 key.
3. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to choose a file and press the Enter key.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. NBDP FILE OPERATIONS
4. Enter a new name.
5. Press the Enter key.
9.7
Saving a File Under a New Name
You may save a file under a new name as follows:
1. Open a file.
2. Edit the file as necessary.
3. Press the function key F1.
4. Press the 3 key to save the file.
5. Press the Y key.
6. Press the Backspace key to erase the original name and then enter a new name.
7. Press the Enter key.
9.8
Deleting Files
Insert appropriate floppy disk in the drive and do the following to delete unnecessary files.
1. Press the function key F1.
2. Press the 4 key.
3. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to choose the file to delete and then press the Enter key.
4. Press the Enter key again. (To cancel, press the ↓ key to select NO followed by the
Enter key.)
9.9
Real Time Printing
An incoming or outgoing message can be printed out while it is being received or
transmitted.
1. Press the function key F1 to display the File menu.
2. Press the 6 key to turn real time printing on/off.
When the real time printing is on, “Print” appears in reverse video at the top of the display.
9.10 Printing Files
You can print files stored on floppy disks as follows:
1. Press the function key F1.
2. Press the 7 key.
3. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to choose a file and press the Enter key.
4. Press the Y key.
To stop printing at any time, press F1 and 8 keys.
If the file could not be printed, “Cannot print. Check connection between printer and terminal.
Press any key to escape.” Is displayed.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING,
RECEIVING
This chapter mainly shows you how to transmit and receive telex messages.
10.1 Manual Calling
NOTICE
Before calling, watch the intended TX
frequency carefully to confirm that is
unoccupied.
The simplest way to communicate with a telex subscriber is Manual Calling. For the ARQ
mode, you may display beforehand the message to send, or type your message manually.
1. Press the function key F3 to display the Operate menu.
Operate
1: Call Station
2: Macro Operation
3: File to Send
4: Cancel Sending
5: Scan (Start/Stop)
6: Manual Reception
7: Timer Operation
8: Manual Calling
9: Set Frequency
Operate menu
2. Press the 9 key to choose Set Frequency.
Set Frequency
Tx Freq:
0.00
RX Freq:
0.00
Set frequency screen
3. Input Tx and Rx frequency pair.
4. Press the Enter key.
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
5. Press the function key F3 again and then the 8 key to choose Manual Calling. The
following screen appears.
Manual Calling
Mode : ARQ FEC
ID :
Manual calling screen
6. Use the ← or → key to choose appropriate communication mode.
7. Press the ↓ key and input party’s ID number.
8. Press the Enter key to connect the communication line. “Channel Busy Check” appears.
If the line is free, “Connect”, “Send” and “Lock” appear in highlight as below. Further,
“HT” (High Tension) also appears when the line is connected.
1:File 2:Edit 3:Operate 4:Window 5:Station 6:System 7:WRU 8:HR 9:Over 10:Break
2002-09-08 2:14:28 UTC
Caps-Eng
Station Name
:
HT
Frequency (T/R) : 8765.00 / 8965.00(kHz) Comm Mode :ARQ
Comm Status : Connect Send Lock Error
Sending Volume : 100(%) ARQ Error : 0 ARQ Time : 0(sec)
For ARQ mode, go to step 9. For FEC mode, type your message and go to step 13.
9. Press the function key F7 (WRU). The party’s answerback code appears on the screen.
Note:Step 9 and 10 are needed for ship-to-ship calling only.
10.Press the function key F8 (HR). Your ship’s answerback code is sent to the party.
11. Press the Enter key and type your message.
12.If you want to receive other party’s response, press the function key F9 (Over).
13.Press the function key F10 (Break) to disconnect the line.
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.2 ARQ Mode Operation
In ARQ operation, one station (information sending station) sends data to another block by
block, then listens for the acknowledge signal between blocks from the information
receiving station which requests either the next block or retransmission of the last block if
there is error. The request may be repeated up to 32 times, until the complete block is
received free of error.
Establishing connection
1. Press the function key F3 to display the Operate menu.
Operate
1: Call Station
2: Macro Operation
3: File to Send
4: Cancel Sending
5: Scan (Start/Stop)
6: Manual Reception
7: Timer Operation
8: Manual Calling
9: Set Frequency
2. Press the 1 key to choose Call Station.
1:File 2:Edit 3:Operate 4:Window 5:Station 6:System 7:WRU 8:HR 9:Over 10:Break
2002-01-15 14:41:09 UTC
Caps-Eng
Station Name
Frequenc(T/) : 875.0/ omm Mod:AQ
Comm Sta
: CHOUSHI-8M
Call Station
Station List Station Setup
Sending
ABC-4M
ABC-6M
ABC-12M
ABC-8M
FURUNO
Station : ABC-4M
ID Code : 45678
Mode
: ARQ FEC
CH/Table : Channel Scantable
Num/Table:
Call Station menu
3. Choose a station. (Station must be registered for use in the ARQ mode). Press the
Enter key. The message “Calling Station” appears. If the message shown below
appears, check both the power of the radiotelephone and the connections between the
radiotelephone and the NBDP Terminal Unit.
“Station calling suspended. Check interconnections between the terminal and main units.
Press any key to escape.”
4. When an acknowledge signal is detected, “Connect” appears in reverse video on the
communication status display.
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
Note:If signal conditions are poor, connection may take a while. If the line could not be
connected in one minute, calling stops and “Calling failed” appears. Try step 3
again, one minute later. Should signal conditions worsen during message
transmission, “Error” appears in reverse video and 30 seconds later the line is
disconnected.
5. Transmit message by one of the following methods:
Sending a file stored on a floppy disk
1. Press the function key F7 (WRU) to receive the answerback code of the other station.
Verify that the code from the station called is correct.
2. Press the function key F8 (HR) to transmit your own identity (answerback code).
3. Press the function key F3 and then the 3 key to display the Send file screen.
4. Choose file to send and press the Enter key.
5. Press the Enter key again.
Send File
[A:\TEST1.
File name
LOG File
TEST1.
TEST2.
TEST3.
NBDP
]
Size
52
120
151
180
169
Date & Time
02-10-15 17:25
02-10-10 16:30
02-10-11 09:25
02-10-11 20:16
02-10-12 06:23
[
End of Directory
]
4 Files exist
1454000 bytes free
To select : ENTER To view : SPACE To quit : ESC
Send file screen
Sending volume (percentage of message transmitted, counts upward as the message is
being transmitted), ARQ error count and ARQ transmission time appear on the display.
“Lock” appears in reverse video when the mark and space signals in the receive signal are
normal. “ARQ Error” shows the number of times error was found during transmission. “ARQ
Time” is the time in seconds the communication line has been established.
1:File 2:Edit 3:Operate 4:Window 5:Station 6:System 7:WRU 8:HR 9:Over 10:Break
2002-09-08 2:14:28 UTC
Caps-Eng
Station Name
:
HT
Frequency (T/R) : 8765.00 / 8965.00(kHz) Comm Mode :ARQ
Comm Status : Connect Send Lock Error
Sending Volume : 100(%) ARQ Error : 0 ARQ Time : 0(sec)
Communication status display
6. After the message is transmitted, press the function key F10 (Break) to disconnect the
line.
Type a message from the keyboard
1. After exchanging answerback code by the function key F7 (WRU) and F8 (HR), type
your message directly from the keyboard.
2. To change direction of traffic, press the function key F9 (OVER), or +, ? in order. Then,
the other station becomes the information sending station, your station becomes the
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
information receiving station.
3. Receive a message from the sending station.
4. After completion of communication, press the function key F7 (WRU) key to receive the
answerback code of the other station and then press the function key F8 (HR) to
transmit your own answerback code.
5. Press the function key F10 (Break) to disconnect the line.
Stopping transmission
1. Press the function key F3 and then the 4 key. “Canceled Sending” appears on the
screen. Transmission is stopped but the line is still connected.
2. To disconnect the line, press the F10 key.
10.3 FEC Mode Operation
The FEC mode transmits the same data twice to yield less errors. Compared to the ARQ
mode, the FEC mode is better at communicating with weak signals.
1. Press the function key F3.
2. Press the 1 key to display the Call Station menu.
3. Choose a station which is registered for the FEC mode.
4. Press the Enter key. “CONNECT” appears in reverse video.
5. Transmit a message directly from the keyboard, or do the following to transmit a
message stored on a floppy disk:
Press the function key F3 and the 1 key to choose File to Send. Choose file to send and
then press the Enter key.
6. After the message is transmitted, press the function key F10 (Break) to disconnect the
line.
10.4 Choosing Receive Mode
1. Press the function key F3 and then the 6 key.
2. Choose receive mode:
AUTO: Automatic reception in ARQ or FEC mode
ARQ: International radiotelex ARQ mode
FEC: International radiotelex FEC mode
DIRC: Receive message from teleprinter
3. Press the Enter key. The reception mode appears on the screen.
All received (and transmitted) messages are saved to a floppy disk when “TX/RX MSG
Save” is ON in the System menu. The file is automatically named as follows.
02 01 13 0 0. X X X
Year month date
Serial number from 000
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.5 Communication Example
Call the coast station following the procedure in paragraph 10.2. Then, communicate with
the coast station. Below is a communication example.
Call completed,
connected with
coast station
To send message
to ship
Own answerback code
12345 KOBE X
Selcall No.
Ship name or call sign
1480 HKRDO VRX
MOM
GA+?
OPR+
Automatically sent from Coast
station (ex. Hong Kong)
If this is your first
communications with a
particular coast station,
the coast station asks
for you selcall no. ship
name, call sign and
AAIC (your enterprises
name for which to
charge to charge toll
call. That registers you
with the coast station.
Thereafter, if your
Type at your side within 30 s.
(Call operator manually.)
MOM
1480 HKRDO VRX
12345 KOBE X
KOBE DE HKRDO GOOD MORNING
NW NIL QRV GA+?
Message from coast station
(Wait. From HKRDO to KOBE.
Nothing to send. Do you
have anything to send?)
Type at your side
(GM=Good Morning. I have
a message for you.)
GM NW QTC1+?
answerback code is
correct automatic
transmission is possible.
From coast station.
(Send your message.)
Type at your side
(To send a message file, type
MOM before TOR and wait
awhile.)
QRV K
TOR
GA+?
Teleprinting Over Radio
(Message TX starts.)
NR 9004
Msg No.
TO: TELEX 1234567 FURUNO
JAPAN OFFICE
INT. DEP. SEC-1 MANAGER
FM: KOBE MARU/12345 KOBE X
TEXT:Type message.
Receiver: Telex no.1234567
FURUNO ELEC. CO.
Sende: KOBE MARU
Type message
Message finished. Can you
acknowledge receipt)
KKKK QSL +?
End message.
From coast station
KOBE DE HKRDO QSL NR9004
TKS NW NIL +?
From HKRD0 to KOBE.
Received NR9004. Thank you.
No more to send.
TKS NW NIL BIBI +?
Type at your ship
(Thank you. I have nothing to
send. Bye Bye.
TKS SEE YOU LATER
BIBI
From coast station
Thank you. See you later.)
Coast station disconnects the line.
Communications example
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
Table of abbreviations
Abbreviation Question
Answer or Advice
QRA
QRC
What is the name your station?
The name of my station is · · · · .
By what private enterprise are the
accounts for charges for your station
settled?
The accounts for my station are settled
by the private enterprise · · · · .
QRU
QRV
QRX
Have you any thing for me?
Are you ready?
I have nothing for you.
I am ready.
When will you call me again?
I will call you again at · · · · hours [on
· · · · kHz].
QSJ
What is the charge to be collected to · The charge to be collected to · · · ·
· · · including your internal charge?
including my internal charge is · · · ·
frans · · · · .
QSL
QSX
Can you acknowledge receipt?
I can acknowledge receipt.
Will you listen to · · · · [call sign] on
· · · · kHz?
I am listening to · · · · [call sign] on
· · · · kHz.
QTA
QTC
Shall I cancel message number · · · · ? Cancel message number · · · ·
How many messages have you to
send?
I have · · · · message for you.
QTU
What are the hours your station is
open?
My station is open from · · · · to · · · ·
hours.
Abbreviation
Definition
BK
Signal used to interrupt a transmission progress.
CFM
DE
Confirm
"From · · · · "
K
Invitation to transmit.
I have nothing to send to you.
Now
NIL
NW
PSE
R
Please
Received
REF
SVC
Reference to · · · · .
Prefix indicating a service telegram.
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
Command and abbreviation
Command
TGM+
Function
To indicate that the following message is a radiotelegram.
To indicate that the ship station needs to be connected immediately any message held.
Call operator.
MSG+
OPR+
URG+
Safety, urgency and distress message.
MED+
Request medical advice.
TEST+
BRK+
Request coast station to send a test message for checking the ship station.
To clear the connection with the coast station.
Abbreviation
GA+
I am ready. Transmit your command.
Wait a moment.
MOM
MSG+
Request pending messages from the shore.
KKKK or NNNN Terminate a message.
Typo
XXXXX
10.6 Timer Operation
A built-in timer permits automatic transmission and reception of telex messages.
10.6.1 Enabling timer operation
1. Press the function key F3 to display the Operate menu.
2. Press the 7 key to display the Timer Operation List.
3. Choose the operation (name) you wish to execute.
4. Press the Enter key. An asterisk appears beside the operation selected and “T. Op”
appears in reverse video on the communication status display. If a file stored on a floppy
disk is to be sent, be sure the floppy disk containing the file is inserted in the drive.
Timer Operation List
*1
2
3
OP4
OP5
Timer operation list
5. Choose another operation (name) if desired.
6. Press the Esc key.
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
When the predetermined time comes, the NBDP Terminal Unit automatically sends or
receives the message. The results of timer operation are displayed as either OK or NG (No
Good) on the Timer Operation List.
Timer Operation List
*1
OK
2
*3
*OP4
*OP5
OK
OK
NG
Timer operation list
10.6.2 Stopping timer operation
1. Press the function key F3.
2. Press the 7 key.
3. Choose the operation (name) which has an asterisk attached to it and then press the
Enter key. Remove all asterisks to cancel all timer programs.
10.7 Scanning
The radio equipment scans a group of operator-selected frequencies (channels), and stops
scanning when an signal is received. For registering scan group, see paragraph 8.5.
1. Press the function key F3 and then the 5 key to show the Scanning Group List on your
screen.
You can confirm the scan channel by pressing the ↑ or ↓ key while pressing the Shift key.
Scanning Group List
*1
2
3
Scanning group list
2. Choose a scan group and press the Enter key.
3. The scanning starts and the indication “Scan” appears in reverse video. Further, the
name of the scan group appears in the Station Name field.
1:File 2:Edit 3:Operate 4:Window 5:Station 6:System 7:WRU 8:HR 9:Over 10:Break
2002-09-08 2:01:46 UTC
Scan HT
Frequency (T/R) : 8344.00 / 8705.00(kHz) Comm Mode : Auto
Comm Status : Connect Send Lock Error
Caps-Eng
Station Name
: SAITO-1
Sending Volume : 100(%) ARQ Error : 0 ARQ Time : 0(sec)
Communication status display
4. To stop scanning, press the function key F3 and then the 5 key. “Scan” disappears on
the communication status display.
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.8 Communication Buffer
The communication buffer is a temporary memory which stores transmit and receive
messages. To display the contents of the communication buffer, do the following:
1. Escape from the message creation screen.
2. Press the ↓ key while pressing the Fn key or the ↑ key pressing the Fn key. The contents
of the communication buffer are displayed.
To print them, press the Ctrl and P keys simultaneously. To erase the contents from the
screen, press the ↓ key at the bottom line.
To erase the contents of the buffer, press the F1 and 9 keys.
10.9 Preparing Macrofiles for Automatic Telex
10.9.1 Automatic telex overview
This section shows you how to communicate with a coast station which handles automatic
telex transmission, using macrofiles. You will also need to register communication channels
and stations, and prepare macrofiles.
Coast stations using automatic telex are MCI Marine Services (North America), Sydney
Radio (Australia), Lyngby Radio (Denmark), and others. The procedure is mostly common
to all coast stations, however refer to the coast station’s traffic manual for details.
INTERNATIONAL
TELEX NETWORK
SHIP
STORE-AND-
FORWARD
DIRECT
DIALING
CENTRAL
SYSTEM
SUB-STATION
MULTI-
ADDRESS
SYSTEM
CONTROL
Sample automatic telex network
The service available in automatic telex are
Message transfer between ship and coast station (store-and-forward)
Connection with landline telex (direct dialing)
Multi address.
10-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.9.2 Preparations
To use automatic telex, you will need to register three items:
•
•
•
Answerback code
Scan groups
Station names
Registering answerback code
The coast station assigns a Telex number. This number functions as an answerback code.
An answerback code contains the following:
OOOOO SHIP X
OOOOO: Coast station-assigned five-digit telex code
SHIP:
X:
Ship name
For shipboard station, normally X is entered.
The procedure for registering the answerback code is the same as which appears on page
8-1. If an answerback code was registered before the commissioning of the coast station, a
new answerback code must be entered. To enter a new answerback code, contact
FURUNO or an authorized FURUNO agent or dealer.
Registering scan groups
The central system emits a free-signal to indicate a coast station radio channel is in idle
condition and available for ship-to-shore calls. The free-signal is detected and recognized
by the shipboard equipment as a permission to start the transmission. Then, the shipboard
operator initiates a call.
You can scan search for the free-signal automatically by registering coast station radio
channels in scan group(s). The procedure for registering scan groups for coast station use
is the same as that which appears on page 8-7.
Registering stations
The next step is to enter station name. The procedure is the same as that shown on page
8-3.
10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.9.3 Commands
The tables which follows describe the commands for macro operation
Command
(Prefixed with @)
CALL
Parameter
Content
S: Station Name
Two digits, 0-99 min.
Calling station name and ID on assigned
parameter
FREE (support
command for CALL)
Free-signal searching time according to
assigned parameter (default setting: 10
min)
$RRR$ signal
Detect free signal of dot pattern
Calling according to assigned parameter
(default setting: 10 min)
RETRY (support
command for CALL)
CASE
Two digits, 0-99 min.
Text
For receiving a message (designated by
parameter) transmitted by coast station
Time allotted for reception of message by
CASE command
TIMEOUT (support
command for CALL)
SEND
Two digits, 0-99 min.
Text
Text transmitted according to assigned
parameters
A: file name
None
Send a file from floppy disk
Function keys F7 – F10
WRU
HR
OVER
BREAK
DISPLAY
INPUT
Text
Text of message appears
None
Waiting for keyboard input
Transmit keyboard input message
Commands processed by Danish coast station Lyngby
Command
Function
BRK+
Disconnection communications line
DIRTLX ……+ Direct dialing telex (receive only)
KKKK
LTR+
Terminate message
For telex letters mailed from Operations Station to destinations worldwide
Request medical advice
Requesting operating assistance
Send position data
Status requested on a store-and-forward message
Store-and-forward method
MED+
OPR+
POS+
STA+
TLX ……+
For details, consult the coast station’s traffic manual.
10-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.9.4 Store-and-forward method
The following is the sequence of events in transmission of a file by the store-and-forward
method.
1. Shipboard station sends message to coast station.
2. Coast station stores message in memory buffer.
3. Shipboard station and coast station clear the radio circuit.
4. Coast station sends message to subscriber designated.
Actual procedure for store-and-forward telex
No. Procedure
Display
Remarks
1
2
Call a c.oast station.
CONNECT appears Free-signal found;
in reverse video
radio circuit ready.
(and bell sounds).
Transmit WRU signal.
00190 TLG DK
Initial identity
26 X X X SHIP X exchange between coast
GA+?
station and shipboard
station
3
Key in subscriber's Telex number.
Example: (Hong Kong) 12345
MSG+?
Request to start
message transmission
TLX80212345+
Transmit file.
4
5
Message transmission
When transmission is completed,
type KKKK.
26 X X X SHIP X Transmit your
00190 TLG DK
answerback code.
Receive other party's
answerback code.
GA+?
6
Transmit BREAK command to
clear radio circuit.
10-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
Procedure for preparing a macrofile for store-and-forward method
You will need a macrofile to enable automatic message transmission by store-and-forward
method. After preparing it, save it to a floppy disk for future use.
1. Press function key F1 to display the File menu.
2. Press the 1 key.
3. Prepare macrofile. Below is simple example.
< [1] UNTITLED1 >
@FREE $RRR$
@CALL S:LYNGBY RADIO
@WRU
1
2
@CASE GA+?
@SEND TLX80212345+
@CASE MSG+?
@SEND A: \ABC
@SEND KKKK
3
4
5
@CASE GA+?
@SEND BRK+
1 Search dot pattern free signal until it is found
2 Station name (Example: LYNGBY RADIO)
Who are you?
Station identity exchange
3 Subscriber's Telex number (in example, 802 is country
code of Hong Kong) for store-and-forward method
4 Location and name of file message
A: ABC
5 Request for termination of message
Sample macrofile for store-and-forward method
4. Press function key F1 to display the File menu.
5. Press the 3 key. The Close Text appears on the display.
close Text
Save File?
Yes
No
(UNTITLED 1)
Close text prompt
10-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
6. Press the Enter key and enter a file name as follows:
OOOOOOOO.MCR
↑
↑
File Name Extension Name
(max. 8 characters)
7. Press the Enter key.
DIRTLX macrofile
Sample DIRTLX macrofile
@FREE $RRR$
1
2
@CALL S: LYNGBY RADIO
@WRU
@CASE GA+?
@SEND DIRTLX725644325+
@CASE MSG+?
@SEND A: \ABC
@SEND KKKK
3
4
5
@CASE GA+?
@SEND BRK+
1 Search dot pattern free signal until it is found
2 Station name (Example: LYNGBY RADIO)
Who are you?
Station identity exchange
3 Subscriber's Telex number (in example, 72 is country
code of JAPAN) for direct dialing mode
4 Location and name of file message
A: ABC
5 Request for termination of message
Sample DIRLTX macrofile
10-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
Procedure for DIRTLX
No. Procedure
Display
Remarks
1
2
Call a c.oast station.
CONNECT appears Free-signal found;
in reverse video
radio circuit ready.
(and bell sounds).
Transmit WRU signal.
00190 TLG DK
Initial identity
26 X X X SHIP X exchange between coast
GA+?
station and shipboard
station
3
Key in subscriber's Telex number.
Example: (Japan) 5644325
12:20
MOM
5644325 FURUNO J
MSG+
Request to start
message transmission
DIRTLX725644325+
4
5
Transmit file.
Message transmission
26 X X X SHIP X
5644325 FURUNO J
00190 TLG DK
DURATION ...
TIME ...
When transmission is completed,
type KKKK.
Transmit your
answerback code.
Receive other party's
answerback code.
GA+?
6
Transmit BREAK command to
clear radio circuit.
10-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
10.10 Automatic Telex using Macrofile
This section describes how to transmit a telex message using a macrofile.
Basic procedure
1. Register answerback code (Telex number assigned by coast station).
2. Register coast station frequency and channel to scan group.
3. Register station name including scan group name.
4. Retrieve appropriate macrofile. Include station name and message file name. Type
message and save file to memory.
5. Open macro operation menu and select a macrofile. Your message will be transmitted
automatically. Below is the sequence of automatic message transmission to a coast
station.
6. Search for free-signal
7. Call coast station on one of its radio channels
8. After connection is established, identity exchange
9. Transmission of service category and subscriber’s address
10.Transmission of message
11. Transmission of termination of message signal
a) Identity exchange
b) Clearing of radio circuit
Actual procedure
1. Press function key F3 to display the Operate menu.
Operate
1: Call Station
2: Macro Operation
3: File to Send
4: Cancel Sending
5: Scan (Start/Stop)
6: Manual Reception
7: Timer Operation
8: Manual Calling
9: Set Frequency
Operate menu
2. Press the 2 key to display the Call Macro screen.
10-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. NBDP TRANSMITTING, RECEIVING
Call Macro
[A:\TEST1.
File name
]
Size
Date & Time
LYNGBY1.MCR
169
02-10-13 06:23
[
End of Directory
]
1 Files exist
1454000 bytes free
To select : ENTER To view : SPACE To quit : ESC
Call macro screen
3. Press the ↓ key to choose a macrofile.
4. Press the Enter key.
Call Macro: Lyngby1.MCR
Yes
No
Call OK?
Press the Enter key to confirm the macrofile selected. The Wait for Free Signal indication
appears. Your message will be transmitted automatically.
10-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE &
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
NOTICE
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant
or contact spray to coating or plastic
parts of the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
Those items contain organic solvents that
can damage coating and plastic parts,
especially plastic connectors.
11.1 Radiotelephone Test
Do the following to check the radiotelephone for proper operation.
1. At the RT or Scan screen, press the 3/TEST key to show the following window.
Which test do you carry out?
CANCEL DAILY SELFCHECK
2. For the self check, choose SELF CHECK and push the ENTER knob to start the test.
OK or NG (No Good) appears as the test result for each item checked. For NG, contact
your dealer for advice.
Tx selfcheck
Tx selfcheck
Tx selfcheck
PLL : OK
RF
: OK
: OK
PLL : OK
PLL : OK
RF
: OK
: OK
: OK
PA1 : OK
PA2
PA1 : OK
PA3 : OK
PA2
PA4
RF : OK
PA : OK
TX FIL : OK
COUPL : OK
COMB : OK
TX : OK
COUPL : OK
COMB1: OK
COMB : OK
TXFILE : OK
COMB2: OK
COUPL : OK
(FS-2570)
(FS-1570)
(FS-5070)
3. Press the CANCEL key to quit the test and return to the previously used screen.
4. Choose DAILY and push the ENTER knob to show the Daily test display. After several
seconds, the test shows results.
Daily test
Daily test
JUL-26-2006-18:10
RCVR1
RCVR2
TRX
: OK*
MAIN
: 0550225-01
: 0550222-01
: 0550222-01
: 0550207-01
: 0550208-01
: OK*
: OK*
Rotate the ENTER knob.
PANEL 1
PANEL 2
DSC
RCVR1, RCVR2, TRX:
Printed circuit board
NBDP
*: If "NG", ask your dealer.
5. Confirm the RCVR1, RCVR2 and TRX are indicated “OK”. If “NG” (No Good) appears,
ask your dealer.
6. Press the CANCEL key to close the test screen.
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is vital for maintaining performance. Following the procedures below
will help keep the equipment in top operating condition.
Maintenance check points
Item
Check Point
Remedy/Remarks
Antenna
Check for physical damage and
corrosion.
Replace damaged parts.
Wire
antenna
Check that the antenna is properly
spanned and separated sufficiently
from metallic structures.
Check for salt water deposits on
insulators. Check that connection at
the lead-in insulator is tight and
rust-free.
If necessary, re-span antenna.
Insulators
for antenna
Replace damage insulators. Remove
salt water deposits. Clean with fresh
water, then dry. Remove rust, then
tighten bolts and lock nuts. Cover
metallic surface with sealing
compound.
Antenna
coupler
• Check condition of antenna terminal,
ground, coaxial cable and control
cable.
• Tighten loosened
connections.
• Fasten lid firmly and evenly to
• Check that coupler lid and cable
glands are firmly secure.
prevent water leakage.
• Replace if damaged.
Check for physical damage, corrosion
and salt water deposits.
Control
unit
• Check ground connection, control
cable, and external equipment.
Confirm that there are no objects on
the top of the control unit.
• Tighten loosened
connections; remove foreign
material from connectors.
• Remove any objects.
• Remove dust from control unit with
• Wipe the LCD carefully to
prevent scratching, using
tissue paper and an LCD
cleaner. To remove dirt or salt
deposits, use an LCD cleaner,
wiping slowly with tissue
paper so as to dissolve the
dirt or salt. Change paper
frequently so the salt or dirt
will not scratch the LCD.
soft cloth.
Note: Do not use chemical cleaners to
clean the control unit; they can remove
paint or markings or deform the
equipment.
Transceiver
unit
• Check connection at signal cable,
coaxial cable, control cable, power
cable, and navigator.
• Tighten loosened connections;
remove foreign material from
connectors.
• Confirm that there are no objects on
• Remove any objects.
the top of the cabinet.
Power supply
• Check that the supply voltage at
transmission is within the rated range
(21.6 to 31.2 VDC at the power
connector).
• If not within the range, check
ship’s mains or ship’s battery.
Low voltage may cause
erratic operation.
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
11.3 Simple Troubleshooting
The table below provides possible problems and the means with which to restore normal
operation. If normal operation cannot be restored, do not attempt to check inside the
equipment. Any servicing should be referred to a qualified technician.
Problem
Probable cause
Remedy
Power cannot
be turned on.
• Mains switchboard may be off.
• (DC) voltage is too high.
• Battery may have discharged, or
•
•
•
Turn on the mains switchboard.
Check supply voltage.
Recharge battery and tighten battery
terminals.
poor contact at terminals.
Display
•
Contrast is too low.
•
Operate the 9/
key to adjust
contrast.
indications do
not appear but
key lamps are
lit.
Power is on but
no sound from
loudspeaker.
Poor articulation
•
•
Loudspeaker is off.
•
Operate the 7/ key to turn on the
loudspeaker.
Wrong class of emission
may be in use.
•
•
Class of emission should match that of
incoming signal.
Output power
reduced to LOW
• Power is automatically reduced
to protect against overheating
due to continuous transmission.
Wait until the unit returns to normal
condition.
Antenna coupler
cannot tune
antenna
• Antenna may be
disconnected or shorted to
ground.
•
•
Check antenna connection.
Recommended length is 10 to 18
meters.
• Antenna is out of tunable
•
•
Check coupler ground.
length.
Checks mains voltage and polarity.
If normal, reset breaker.
• Poor grounding of antenna
coupler.
•
Check cable.
• Breaker in coupler has
tripped.
• Connection cable loosened
or disconnected.
The message
“Ship’s mains
failure” appears,
and Output
power indicator
blinks.
• Input has been switched from AC • Press the CANCEL key. The output
to DC when AC FAIL line of
AC/DC power supply unit
PR-850A is connected to
FS-5070.
power can be increased on the RT
display. Note that the output power
remains “HIGH” when it occurs while
sending the distress call. When AC power
is restored, this problem is automatically
resolved.
Transmission
power is
decreased to
LOW2.
(FS-5070 only)
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
11.4 Error Messages
The table below shows error messages, their meanings, and remedies. If oter error occurs,
contact your dealer.
Error messages
Error message
Busy: RT
Meaning
Radiotelephone is in operation.
Remedy
Wait until the radiotelephone is
free.
Channel Busy
You attempted to transmit on a
channel which is currently busy.
(This occurs with Routine and
Business priorities only.)
The message is automatically
erased when the channel becomes
clear.
EPFS error
No position data from navigator for
one minute.
Press the CANCEL key to silence
the alarm. Check the navigator. If it
is malfunctioning, manually enter
position.
Incoming
Incoming DSC call
Message is automatically cleared
when DSC signal has gone.
Check the navigator.
No position data
No response: RT
The position data is interrupted
while AUTO operation.
Radiotelephone is not powered or is Check radiotelephone connection.
disconnected.
Oven cold. Tx not
ready; wait
Oven too cold; cannot transmit.
Wait until the oven becomes
sufficiently warm.
Printer not ready
Automatic print is selected;
however, printer is not powered or is
disconnected.
Check printer.
Trouble: Oven not
ready
Oven not ready; cannot transmit.
Wait until the oven is ready.
Contact your dealer.
TRX PLL UNLOCK
TRX PLL unlock. Transmission is
stopped.
TUNE error
Tuning failed. Transmission power is Try to tune again. If unsuccessful,
decreased to LOW2. For NBDP,
transmission is stopped.
confirm if TUNE error occurs on
other frequencies. See “Antenna
coupler cannot tune antenna” on
page 11-3, or contact your dealer.
Warning: Update
position
Position data is older by the amount Press the CANCEL key to silence
of time preset on the Alarm menu.
alarm. Reenter position on the
Position menu.
Watchdog error.
Please Power OFF
Internal error (such as CPU trouble) Turn the power off and on to erase
detected. Accompanied with alarm, the message. Have a qualified
same type as for distress.
W/R1, W/R2 PLL unlock.
Transmission is stopped.
technician check the set.
Contact your dealer.
RX1 PLL UNLOCK
RX2 PLL UNLOCK
Ship’s mains failure Power input has been switched from Press the CANCEL key to use the
AC to DC at PR-850A.
low output power. Check the AC
input supply.
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
11.5 Replacement of Fuses
To protect the equipment from overcurrent and equipment fault, two fuses are provided in
the PR-300 Power Supply Unit. If a fuse blows, find the cause before replacing it. If it blows
again after replacement, request service.
WARNING
Fuse
Unit
Use the proper fuse.
10 A (100 VAC) or
5 A (200 VAC) and
20 A (24 VDC)
Power Supply Unit
PR-300
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or
damage to the equipment.
Note: The Power Supply Unit PR-850A (for FS-1570/2570), used with the equipment, does
not have a fuse but a circuit breaker. If the breaker has tripped, find the reason before
resetting the breaker (upward position).
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
11.6 Test Call
This function sends a test signal to a coast or ship station, over one of six distress and
safety frequencies. For that reason, it should not be executed unnecessarily. You can
prepare a test call beforehand (see Chapter 6) or at the moment you intend to send a test
call. To send a prepared test call, see paragraph 6.5.4 for the procedure. When sending the
test call at the moment, do the following.
1. Press the 2/DSC key.
Select Message
GENERAL
DISTRESS
INDIVIDUAL
RELAY AREA
RELAY COAST
DISTRESS
PSTN MESSAGE
TEST MESSAGE
GROUP MESSAGE
AREA MESSAGE
POSITION
SPECIAL
MMSI 123456789
UTC 01:53
EPFS 01:54
POS 12 34.5678N
123 45.6789E
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose TEST MESSAGE and then push the ENTER knob.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the STATION ID window.
4. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose MANUAL or SELECT.
5. For SELECT, you can choose an ID from the message file list stored.
6. For MANUAL, using the numeric keys, key in the ID of the station ID (nine digits) where
to send the call and then push the ENTER knob.
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
PRIORITY
: TEST MESSAGE
*********
: SAFETY
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
7. Push the ENTER knob to open the DSC FREQ menu. (Note that PRIORITY is
automatically selected to SAFETY.)
Compose msg.
2187.5
MSG TYPE
STATION ID
PRIORITY
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
DSC FREQ
kHz
GO TO VIEW
8. Rotate the ENTER knob to choose an appropriate frequency and then push the ENTER
knob. The display changes as below.
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
Compose msg.
MSG TYPE
: TEST MESSAGE
001234567
: SAFETY
STATION ID
PRIORITY
:
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
GO TO VIEW
9. Press the CALL key to send the test call (transmission time: about seven seconds).
10.The display shows “Test message in progress!” while the test call is being transmitted.
Test
message in progress!
DESTINATION ID
PRIORITY
:
001234567
:SAFETY
DSC FREQ
TIME TO GO
:
:
2187.5 kHz
7S
After the test call is completed, the following message appears.
Waiting for test
acknowledgement.
: 001234567
: SAFETY
DESTINATION ID
PRIORITY
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
TIME TO GO : 4M12S RESENDING
One of the following displays appears. (“No response! Try calling again?” appears when the
timer counts down to zero, meaning no response from station.)
Test acknowledge
message received.
No response!
Try calling again?
DESTINATION ID:
PRIORITY:
001234567
SAFETY
CANCEL: STOP ALARM
DSC FREQ
:
2187.5 kHz
RESEND
Test acknowledge received
No response to test call
11.Do the either way depending on the message shown in step 10.
Test acknowledge message received
The audio alarm sounds; press the CANCEL key to silence the alarm. The display changes
as below.
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
Received message
MAR-23-2006-23:59
*
*
TEST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
SENDER ID :
PRIORITY:
001234567
SAFETY
3M10S
GO TO VIEW
No response! Try calling again?
Re-send call: Push the ENTER knob and then press the CALL key.
Cancel call: Press the CANCEL key to return to the previous screen.
11.7 NBDP Terminal Unit Maintenance
Regular maintenance is important for good performance. A regular maintenance program
should be established and should at least include the items mentioned below.
11.7.1 Cleaning the equipment
Wipe off accumulated dust from the terminal unit with a soft cloth. Wipe the LCD carefully to
prevent scratching, using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt deposits,
use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt.
Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will not scratch the surface of LCD. Do not use
solvents such as thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning; they can remove paint and
marks or deform the equipment.
11.7.2 Connectors and earth connection
Periodically check the connectors for proper seating and the earth connection for rust.
Remove rust to maintain a good ground system.
11.7.3 Floppy disk drive
Foreign material on the floppy disk drive head can scratch the magnetic material in the
floppy, resulting in loss of data. Clean the floppy disk drive head regularly with a floppy disk
drive cleaning disk to prevent erasure of information stored on disks.
11.7.4 Diagnostics
General diagnostics
1. Press the function key F6 to display the System menu.
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
System
Lock Change Default
Setup
Slave Delay
8 msec (0- 50 msec)
TX/RX MSG Save
Edit Before sending
OFF O N
OFF O N
Time System
Time & Date
Window Color
Self Test
OFF UTC SMT JST
2006/10/16 10:00:00
System menu (Example: IB-583)
2. Choose Change from Setup.
3. Choose Self Test (at the bottom of the screen).
4. Press the Esc key. The results of the self test are displayed a short time later.
Selftest
Terminal Unit Test : ver. X.XX
:OK
:OK
:OK
:OK
:OK
IB-581/IB-583
Main Termina soft (T-CPU Board)
Main Unit Test
Modem Unit Test
Radio Unit Test
DSC Unit Test
: ver. XX
: ver. XX
: ID FS5070
: ID FS5070
NBDP Modem
Printer Unit Test* : Print all character :OK
X.XX = Version No.
*: "NG" and "Printer not ready" when printer is off or
is abnormal.
Self test results
The test results are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, try the self test again. If it
appears again, call for service. When the test is completed, the message “Selftest
Completed. Press any key to escape.” Appears.
Tone test
1. Choose Self Test from the System Menu.
2. While pressing and holding down the Shift key, press the ↓ key to show the Tone Test
menu.
Tone Test
1: Tone Test 1 (All Char)
2: Tone Test 2 (Fox)
3: Tone Test 3 (Beta)
3. Choose a test and press the Enter key.
4. You may stop a tone test at anytime by pressing the Esc key.
Tone test 1 (All characters)
This test checks for proper transmission of all figures, letters and codes. To conduct the test,
call a station in the ARQ or FEC mode. Execute the test, confirming that all characters are
transmitted correctly. “Now Testing Tone Test 1” appears during the testing. Since the test is
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. MAINTENANCE & TROUBLESHOOTING
conducted continuously, you may press the Esc key twice followed by the F10 key to stop
the test and return to the tone test menu.
1:File 2:Edit 3:Operate 4:Window 5:Station 6:System 7:WRU 8:HR 9:Over 10:Break
System
Lock Change Default
: Connect Sen
Station Name
Frequency (T/R) :
Comm Status
:
Setup
/
Now Testing Tone Test 1 (All Char).
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890-?:().,'=/+abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
wxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890-?:().,'=/+abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv
wxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Tone test 2 (Fox)
This test (continuously) checks for proper transmission of the test message THE QUICK
BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 0123456789. To conduct the test, call a
station by using the ARQ or FEC mode.
Tone test 3 (Beta)
You may check for proper transmission of the idle signal β. Call up a station using the ARQ
mode.
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Menu Tree
#/SETUP key
HS. VOL (0 to 63, 45)
NB (OFF, ON)
SQ (500-2000 Hz, 800 Hz )
Default settings
in boldface italic.
USER CH (Shows user ch entry screen.)
MESSAGE (Shows Message file entry screen)
POSITION (Shows Position setup screen)
DATE/TIME (Shows Date/Time setup screen)
MEM CLR
(RCVD ORDINARY LOG, RCVD DISTRESS LOG,
TRANSMITTED LOG, MESSAGE FILES, USER CHANNELS,
LOAD DEFAULT)
USR SETUP
ALARM
INTERNAL ALARM (ON, OFF)
POSITION OLDER (0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0)
EXT ALARM (DSTRS/URG, ROUTINE, ALL, OFF)
ALARM DISTANCE (OFF, 500NM)
KEY CLICK (ON, OFF)
SOUND
ORDINARY ALARM (0 to 63, 47)
DISTRESS ALARM (51 to 63, 51)
COMPLY TYPE (UNABLE, ABLE)
UNABLE REASON (NO REASON, BUSY,
EQUIP DISABLE, MODE NOT
AUTO ACK
USABLE, CH NOT USABLE)
POSITION MESSAGE (OFF, ON)
POLLING MESSAGE (OFF, ON)
TEST MESSAGE (OFF, ON)
XMIT MESSAGE (MANUAL, AUTO)
RCVD MESSAGE (MANUAL, AUTO)
DAILY TEST (MANUAL, AUTO)
PRINT OUT
SCAN FREQ (ROUTINE: 2M ON, DISTRESS: all ON)
KEY ASSIGN (NONE, NB, TONE, SDUP/DUP)
SPECIAL MSG NEUTRAL MSG (UNABLE, ABLE)
MEDICAL MSG (UNABLE, ABLE)
FAX Rx (ENABLE, DISABLE)
HOOK SP OFF (ON, OFF)
TIMER (10 MIN, OFF)
SYS SETUP (Display system settings.)
AP-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
NBDP terminal unit (telex)
Default settings in boldface italic.
F1: File
F5: Station
1: New
1: Station Entry
2: Open
3: Close
2: Timer Operation Entry
3: Scan Entry
4: Delete
5: Rename
4: User Channel Entry
5: Answerback Code Entry
6: Group ID Entry (4/5 digit)
7: Group ID Entry (9 digit)
8: Select ID Entry (4/5 digit)
9: Select ID Entry (9 digit)
6: Real Time Printing
7: File to Print
8: Cancel Priniting
9: Clear Buffer
0: Floppy Disk Format
F2: Edit
F6: System
1: Undo
Setup (Lock, Change, Default)
2: Cut
Slave Delay (0-50 msec, 8)
3: Copy
4: Paste
5: Select All
6: Search
TX/RX MSG Save (OFF, ON)
Edit Before Sending (OFF, ON)
Time System (OFF, UTC, SMT, JST)
Time & Date
7: Replace
8: Goto Top
9: Goto Bottom
0: Goto Line
A: Change Text
Display Mode (IB-581) (Normal, Reverse)
Window Color
Window
Window
Color
Setup
BASE WINDOW, BACK SCROLL,
EDIT 1-2, FUNCTION, SUB MENU 1-3,
MESSAGE
(IB-583)
Fore Color
Back Color
L-WHITE, YELLOW,
L-MAGENTA, L-RED,
L-CYAN, L-GREEN,
L-BLUE, GRAY,
Default Color
F3: Operate
1: Call Station
2: Macro Operation
3: File to Send
WHITE, BROWN,
MAGENTA, RED,
CYAN, GREEN,
4: Cancel Sending
5: Scan (Start/Stop)
6: Manual Reception
7: Timer Operation
8: Manual Calling
9: Set Frequency
BLUE, BLACK
Self Test
F4: Window
1: Calendar
2: Distress Frequency Table
F7: WRU (Who are you?)
F8: HR (Here is)
F9: Over
F10: Break
AP-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Frequency Tables
DSC frequency table
TX (kHz)
2187.5
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
RX (kHz)
Remarks
File Name
2187.5
4207.5
6312.0
8414.5
12577.0
16804.5
455.5
Distress and
Safety Frequencies
458.5
2189.5(2177.0*)
4208.0
INTL-0.4M
2177.0
4219.5
6331.0
8436.5
12657.0
16903.0
19703.5
22444.0
26121.0
INTL-2M
INTL-4M
INTL-6M
INTL-8M
INTL-12M
INTL-16M
INTL-18M
INTL-22M
INTL-25M
6312.5
8415.0
International
Frequencies
12577.5
16805.0
18898.5
22374.5
25208.5
4208.5
6313.0
4220.0
6331.5
LOCAL1-4M
LOCAL1-6M
LOCAL1-8M
LOCAL1-12M
LOCAL1-16M
LOCAL1-18M
LOCAL1-22M
LOCAL1-25M
8415.5
8437.0
12578.0
16805.5
18899.0
22375.0
25209.0
12657.5
16903.5
19704.0
22444.5
26121.5
Local-1
Frequencies
4209.0
6313.5
4220.5
6332.0
LOCAL2-4M
LOCAL2-6M
LOCAL2-8M
LOCAL2-12M
LOCAL2-16M
LOCAL2-18M
LOCAL2-22M
LOCAL2-25M
8416.0
8437.5
12578.5
16806.0
18899.5
22375.5
25209.5
12658.0
16904.0
19704.5
22445.0
26122.0
Local-2
Frequencies
14. = Ship-to-ship
AP-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Custom channels (to be programmed by FURUNO dealers)
CH NO
Ship Receive (kHz)
Ship Transmit (kHz)
Remarks
AP-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
MF band working carrier frequencies (ref. US CFR 47 Part 80.371)
Ship Transmit
(kHz)
Ship Receive
(kHz)
Ship Transmit
(kHz)
Ship Receive
Region
East Coast
Region
Gulf Coast
(kHz)
2466.0
2530.0
2538.0
2550.0
2558.0
2598.0
2450.0
2482.0
2572.0
2506.0
2514.0
2550.0
2582.0
2309.0
2312.0
2400.0
2530.0
2506.0
2585.0
2530.0
2506.0
2031.5
2118.0
2126.0
2142.0
2166.0
2198.0
2366.0
2382.0
2390.0
2400.0
2406.0
2003.0
2009.0
2009.0
2031.5
2126.0
2206.0
2382.0
2430.0
2490.0
2514.0
2522.0
2538.0
2558.0
2590.0
2450.0
2482.0
2566.0
2400.0
2506.0
2450.0
2442.0
2566.0
2566.0
2522.0
2598.0
2466.0
2482.0
2009.0
2134.0
2142.0
2158.01
2166.0
2206.0
2366.0
2382.0
2430.0
2458.0
2118.0
2158.0
2206.0
2131.0
2134.0
2240.0
2134.0
2009.0
2086.03
2134.0
2009.0
2
Great Lakes
Alaska
West Coast
Hawaii
Caribbean
Guam
Above frequencies are not programmed. Contact a FURUNO representative.
1 = Unlimited use December 15 to April 1
2 = 2206 kHz for distress only
3 = Limited to pep of 150 W.
AP-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
MF band SSB working carrier frequencies
Ship Receive
(kHz)
1635
1638
1641
1644
1647
1650
1653
1656
1659
1662
1665
1668
1671
1674
1677
1680
1683
1686
1689
1692
1695
1698
1701
1704
1707
1710
1713
1716
1719
1722
Ship Transmit
(kHz)
2060
2063
2066
2069
2072
2075
2078
2081
2084
2087
2090
2093
2096
2099
2102
2105
2108
2111
2114
2117
2120
2123
2126
2129
2132
2135
2138
2060
2063
2066
Ship Receive
(kHz)
1725
1728
1731
1734
1737
1740
1743
1746
1749
1752
1755
1758
1761
1764
1767
1770
1773
1776
1779
1782
1785
1788
1791
1794
1797
Ship Transmit
(kHz)
2069
2072
2075
2078
2081
2084
2087
2090
2093
2096
2099
2102
2105
2108
2111
2114
2117
2120
2123
2126
2129
2132
2135
2138
2060
CH NO
CH NO
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
AP-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
4/6 MHz ITU SSB carrier frequencies (ITU RR Appendix 16)
4 MHz SSB (J3E)
Ship RX
4357
6 MHz SSB (J3E)
Ship RX
6501
ITU CH NO
401
Ship TX
4065
4068
4071
4074
4077
4080
4083
4086
4089
4092
4095
4098
ITU CH NO
601
Ship TX
6200
6203
6206
6209
6212
6215
6218
6221
6224
6227
6230
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
4360
4363
4366
4369
4372
4375
4378
4381
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
6504
6507
6510
6513
6516
6519
6522
6224
410
411
412
4384
4387
4390
610
611
6227
6230
These frequencies are factory programmed.
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
4393
4396
4399
4402
4405
4408
4411
4414
4101
4104
4107
4110
4113
4116
4119
4122
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
4417
4420
4423
4426
4429
4432
4435
4351
4354
4146
4149
4000
4003
4006
4009
4012
4015
4125
4128
4131
4134
4137
4140
4143
4351
4354
4146
4149
4000
4003
4006
4009
4012
4015
430
431
432 (01)
433 (02)
434 (03)
435 (04)
436 (05)
437 (06)
CH NOs in ( ) are ITU NOs (RR Section C-1).
438 (07)
439 (08)
440 (09)
4018
4021
4024
4018
4021
4024
441 (10)
442 (11)
443 (12)
444 (13)
445 (14)
446 (15)
447 (16)
448 (17)
449 (18)
450 (19)
451 (20)
452 (21)
4027
4030
4033
4036
4039
4042
4045
4048
4051
4054
4057
4060
4027
4030
4033
4036
4039
4042
4045
4048
4051
4054
4057
4060
AP-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
8 MHz ITU SSB carrier frequencies (ITU RR Appendix 16)
8 MHz SSB (J3E) - Duplex
ITU CH NO
8 MHz SSB (J3E) - Simplex
(ITU CH NO)
Ship RX
8719
8722
8725
8728
8731
8734
8737
8740
8743
8746
8749
8752
8755
8758
8761
8764
8767
8770
8773
8776
8779
8782
8785
8788
8791
8794
8797
8800
8803
8806
8809
8812
8291
8707
8710
8713
8716
Ship TX
8195
8198
8201
8204
8207
8210
8213
8216
8219
8222
8225
8228
8231
8234
8237
8240
8243
8246
8249
8252
8255
8258
8261
8264
8267
8270
8273
8276
8279
8282
8285
8288
8291
8707
8710
8713
8716
Ship RX
8101
8104
8107
8110
8113
8116
8119
8122
8125
8128
8131
8134
8137
8140
8143
8146
8149
8152
8155
8158
8161
8164
8167
8170
8173
8176
8179
8182
8185
8188
8191
Ship TX
8101
8104
8107
8110
8113
8116
8119
8122
8125
8128
8131
8134
8137
8140
8143
8146
8149
8152
8155
8158
8161
8164
8167
8170
8173
8176
8179
8182
8185
8188
8191
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
840 (01)
841 (02)
842 (03)
843 (04)
844 (05)
845 (06)
846 (07)
847 (08)
848 (09)
849 (10)
850 (11)
851 (12)
852 (13)
853 (14)
854 (15)
855 (16)
856 (17)
857 (18)
858 (19)
859 (20)
860 (21)
861 (22)
862 (23)
863 (24)
864 (25)
865 (26)
866 (27)
867 (28)
868 (29)
869 (30)
870 (31)
CH NOs in ( ) are ITU NOs (RR Section C-1).
838
839
8294
8297
8294
8297
AP-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
12/16 ITU SSB carrier frequencies (ITU RR Appendix 16)
12 MHz SSB (J3E)
CH NO. SHIP TX
16 MHz SSB (J3E)
CH NO. SHIP TX
16 MHz SSB (J3E)
SHIP RX
13077
13080
13083
13086
13089
13092
13095
13098
13101
13104
13107
13110
13113
13116
13119
13122
13125
13128
13131
13134
13137
13140
13143
13146
13149
13152
13155
13158
13161
13164
13167
13170
13173
13176
13179
13182
13185
13188
13191
13194
13197
12353
12356
12359
12362
12365
SHIP RX
17242
17245
17248
17251
17254
17257
17260
17263
17266
17269
17272
17275
17278
17281
17284
17287
17290
17293
17296
17299
17302
17305
17308
17311
17314
17317
17320
17323
17326
17329
17332
17335
17338
17341
17344
17347
17350
17353
17356
17359
17362
17365
17368
17371
17374
17377
17380
17383
17386
17389
CH NO.
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
SHIP RX
17392
17395
17398
17401
17404
17407
16528
16531
16534
16537
16540
16543
16546
SHIP TX
16510
16513
16516
16519
16522
16525
16528
16531
16534
16537
16540
16543
16546
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
12230
12233
12236
12239
12242
12245
12248
12251
12254
12257
12260
12263
12266
12269
12272
12275
12278
12281
12284
12287
12290
12293
12296
12299
12302
12305
12308
12311
12314
12317
12320
12323
12326
12329
12332
12335
12338
12341
12344
12347
12350
12353
12356
12359
12362
12365
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
16360
16363
16366
16369
16372
16375
16378
16381
16384
16387
16390
16393
16396
16399
16402
16405
16408
16411
16414
16417
16420
16423
16426
16429
16432
16435
16438
16441
16444
16447
16450
16453
16456
16459
16462
16465
16468
16471
16474
16477
16480
16483
16486
16489
16492
16495
16498
16501
16504
16507
Above is factory programmed.
AP-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
18/19, 22, 25/26 ITU SSB carrier frequencies (ITU RR Appendix 16)
18/19 MHz SSB (J3E)
CH NO. SHIP TX
22 MHz SSB (J3E)
CH NO. SHIP TX
22 MHz SSB (J3E)
SHIP RX
19755
19758
19761
19764
19767
19770
19773
19776
19779
19782
19785
19788
19791
19794
19797
18825
18828
18831
18834
18837
18840
18843
SHIP RX
22696
22699
22702
22705
22708
22711
22714
22717
22720
22723
22726
22729
22732
22735
22738
22741
22744
22747
22750
22753
22756
22759
22762
22765
22768
22771
22774
22777
22780
22783
22786
22789
22792
22795
22798
22801
22804
22807
22810
22813
22816
22819
22822
22825
22828
22831
22834
22837
22840
22843
CH NO.
SHIP RX
22846
22849
22852
22159
22162
22165
22168
22171
22174
22177
SHIP TX
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
18780
18783
18786
18789
18792
18795
18798
18801
18804
18807
18810
18813
18816
18819
18822
18825
18828
18831
18834
18837
18840
18843
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
22000
22003
22006
22009
22012
22015
22018
22021
22024
22027
22030
22033
22036
22039
22042
22045
22048
22051
22054
22057
22060
22063
22066
22069
22072
22075
22078
22081
22084
22087
22090
22093
22096
22099
22102
22105
22108
22111
22114
22117
22120
22123
22126
22129
22132
22135
22138
22141
22144
22147
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
22150
22153
22156
22159
22162
22165
22168
22171
22174
22177
25/26 MHz SSB (J3E)
CH NO Ship TX
Ship RX
26145
26148
26151
26154
26157
26160
26163
26166
26169
26172
25100
25103
25106
25109
25112
25115
25118
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
25070
25073
25076
25079
25082
25085
25088
25091
25094
25097
25100
25103
25106
25109
25112
25115
25118
AP-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
MF band telex frequency table
Ship Transmit
(NBDP, DSC)
Ship Receive
(NBDP, DSC)
CH NO.
2142.0
2142.5
2143.0
2143.5
2144.0
1607.0
2001
2002
1607.5
2003
2004
2005
1608.0
1608.5
1609.0
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2144.5
2145.0
2145.5
2146.0
2146.5
1609.5
1610.0
1610.5
1611.0
1611.5
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2147.0
2147.5
2148.0
2148.5
2149.0
1612.0
1612.5
1613.0
1613.5
1614.0
NBDP/DSC
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2149.5
2150.0
2150.5
2151.0
2151.5
1614.5
1615.0
1615.5
1616.0
1616.5
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2152.0
2152.5
2153.0
2153.5
2154.0
1617.0
1617.5
1618.0
1618.5
1619.0
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2154.5
2155.0
2155.5
2156.0
2156.5
1619.5
1620.0
1620.5
1621.0
1621.5
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2157.0
2157.5
2158.0
2158.5
2159.0
1622.0
1622.5
1623.0
1623.5
1624.0
DSC
2036
2159.5
1624.5
AP-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
ITU Telex frequency table (1/4)
IXFRQUNCYTABLE(1/4)
AP-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
ITU Telex frequency table (2/4)
IXFRQUNCYTABLE(2/4)
AP-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
ITU Telex frequency table (3/4)
IXFRQUNCYTABLE(3/4)
AP-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
ITU Telex frequency table (4/4)
IXFRQUNCYTABLE(/4)
AP-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Telex Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Meaning
ADV
ACK
AGN
BI (GS)
BK
Advise
Acknowledge
Again
Good bye
I cut off.
CFM
COL
Confirm
Collation
CRV
DER
DWN
EEE
How do you receive?
Out of order
Down
Error
FM
From
GA
Go ahead.
Minutes
Wait (Waiting)
Mutilated
MNS
MOM
MUTI
NA
Correspondence to this subscriber is not admitted.
NC
No circuits
NCH
NP
Subscriber's number has been changed.
The called party is not or no longer is a subscriber.
NR
Indicate your call number.
OCC
OK
Subscriber is engaged.
Agreed.
P (or 0)
PLS (PSE)
PPR
Stop your transmission.
Please
Paper
R (RCD)
RAP
Received
I will call you again.
RD
Read
RE
Referrring to
RPT
Repeat
SRY
Sorry
SVP
Please
TAX
What is the charge?
TEST MSG
THRU
TKS (TNX)
TLX
Please send a test message?
You are in communication with telex position
Thanks
Telex
AP-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Digital Interface (IEC 61162-1)
I/O Sentences
Input sentences (IEC 61162-1)
GNS, RMC, GLL, GGA, ZDA
Input sentence description
GGA – Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
| |
|
|
|
+-- 11
| | +---- 10
| +--------- 9
| +---+------------ 8
+---+------------------ 7
| | | +------------------------- 6
| | +---------------------------- 5
| +------------------------------- 4
+----+--------------------------------- 3
+---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. GPS quality indicator
5. Number of satllite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view
6. Horizontal dilution of precision
7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel, m
8. Geoidal separation, m
9. Age of differential GPS data
10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023
11. Checksum
AP-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
GLL – Geographic position – latitude/longitude
$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| | |
| | +------- 6
| +--------- 5
+----------- 4
+---------------- 3
+------+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------------- 1
1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
5. Mode indicator(see note)
6. Checksum
NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be
set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and
D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.
ZDA – Time and date
$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
| |
| |
| |
|
|
|
| | |
| | +--------- 7
| +----------- 6
| +-------------- 5
| | +------------------ 4
| +---------------------- 3
+------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
1. UTC
2. Day, 01 to 31(UTC)
3. Month, 01 to 12(UTC)
4. Year(UTC)
5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h
6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
as local hours
7. Checksum
AP-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
GNS – GNSS fix data
$--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | +------ 10
| | | | | | +---------- 9
| | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | +------------------ 7
| | | +---------------------- 6
| | +------------------------- 5
| +------------------------------ 4
+-----+--------------------------------- 3
+-----+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Mode indicator
5. Total number of satllite in use,00-99
6. HDOP
7. Antenna altitude, metres, re:mean-sea-level(geoid)
8. Geoidal separation
9. Age of differential data
10. Differential reference station ID
11. Checksum
AP-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
RMC – Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| | | |
| | | +--- 10
| | +----- 9
+--+------- 8
+--------------- 7
| +--------------------- 6
| +------------------------- 5
+---+---------------------------- 4
+---+---------------------------------------- 3
+--------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position fix
2. Status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning
3. Latitude, N/S
4. Longitude, E/W
5. Speed over ground, knots
6. Course over ground, degrees true
7. Date: dd/mm/yy
8. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W
9. Mode indicator(see note)
10. Checksum
NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field
shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for
A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator
and Status field shall not be null fields.
AP-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Schematic diagram
T-IF BOARD
05P0757
MOTHER BOARD
05P0759
T-CPU BOARD
05P0732A
S2
OPEN: IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183)
SHORT: CIF
IEC 61162-1
TB6
R58
10
J3
< 41
J1
>
P201
P301
R59 CR11
100
R60
4
5
1
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
25
<
>
41
42
RD3_A
RD3_B
U18
PC-400
330
R59
10
< 42
<
>
>
1SS355
C29 C28
100P 100P
Load requirements as a listener
Isolation: Optocoupler
Input impedance: 450Ω
Max. voltage:
Threshold:
±15 V
4 mA
AP-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Parts List
This equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis and repair down to
component level are not practical (IMO A.694(17)/8.3.1). Only some discrete components
are used. FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd. Believes identifying these components is of no value
for shipboard maintenance; therefore, they are not listed in this manual. Major modules can
be located on the parts location photos on pages AP-26 thru AP-30.
Transceiver unit FS-1570T
F U R U N O
Model
Unit
FS-1570T
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Aug-02 Blk.No.
SYMBOL TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
05P0731, T-I/F
005-963-050
001-033-810
005-963-090
001-005-370
005-963-130
005-963-150
001-005-390
005-963-210
005-963-250
005-963-270
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
05P0732B, T-CPU
05P0733, TX/RX
05P0734A, W/R
05P0735, PA
05P0736, TX-FIL
05P0737A, SW-REG
05P0742, MB
05P0746, PRESEL
05P0747, REF OSC
B13
B14
B17
05P0751B, DSP (DSC)
05P0751A, DSP (NBDP)
05P0744, RELAY
001-010-380
005-963-310
005-963-230
X
X
X
AP-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit FS-2570T
F U R U N O
Model
Unit
FS-2570T
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Aug-02 Blk.No.
SYMBOL TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
B2
B3
B4
B5, B18
B6, B17
B7
B8
B9
05P0731, T-I/F
005-963-050
001-033-810
005-963-090
001-005-370
005-956-570
005-963-170
001-005-390
005-516-340
005-963-250
005-963-270
005-963-230
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
05P0732B, T-CPU
05P0733, TX/RX
05P0734A, W/R
05P0739A, PA
05P0736A, TX-FIL
05P0737A, SW-REG
05P0743, MB
05P0746, PRESEL
05P0747, REF OSC
05P0744, RELAY
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
05P0751B, DSP (DSC)
05P0751A, DSP (NBDP)
05P0738, DRV
001-010-380
005-963-310
005-516-280
X
X
X
B16
05P0740, COMB
005-516-320
X
AP-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Control unit FS-2571C
F U R U N O
Model
Unit
FS-2571C
CONTROL UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Blk.No.
SYMBOL TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
B2
B3
B4
05P0810, PANEL
05P0811A, C-CPU
05P0812A, C-IF
X
X
X
001-031-390
001-033-850
001-033-900
AP-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Control unit FS-5070T
F U R U N O
Model
Unit
FS-5070T
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Blk.No.
SYMBOL TYPE
CODE No.
REMARKS
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
B2
B3
B5
B6, B26
05P0757, T-I/F
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
001-031-480
001-033-810
005-963-090
001-005-370
005-956-570
001-031-570
001-035-390
005-966-060
005-963-310
001-010-380
005-963-310
005-966-210
05P0732B, T-CPU
05P0733, TX/RX
05P0734A, W/R
B17 to 20 05P0739A, PA
B13
B12
B8
05P0741, TX-FIL
05P0737A, SW-REG
05P0759, MB
05P0744, RELAY
05P0751A, DSP (DSC)
05P0751B, DSP (NBDP)
05P0738A, DRV
05P0740, COMB
05P0760, TX
05P0762, RX-FIL
05P0764, PWR
05P0765, DIV
B10, 11
B25
B9
B14
B21, 22
B4
X
X
X
X
X
X
005-516-320
005-031-510
005-031-540
B7
X
X
X
X
005-966-020
005-966-030
005-966-050
B15
B16
B24
05P0758, TB
AP-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Parts Location
FS-1570T
05P0733
05P0744
TX/RX Board
05P0734A
RELAY Board
05P0737A
05P0746
SW-REG Board
W/R Board
PRESEL Board
05P0747
REF OSC
Board
05P0742
MB Board
(underneath)
05P0731
T-I/F Board
05P0735
05P0751A
DSP Board
(for NBDP)
05P0736
PA Board
TX FIL Board
05P0751B
DSP Board
05P0732B
T-CPU Board
AP-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit FS-2570T
05P0734A
W/R (option)
05P0747
REF OSC
05P0738
DRV
05P0739A
PA
05P0734A
W/R
05P0737A
SW-REG
05P0739A
05P0744
RELAY
PA
05P0743
M-B
(behind)
05P0746
PRESEL
05P0731
T-I/F
05P0736A
TX FIL
05P0751A
DSP
(NBDP)
05P0732B
T-CPU
05P0751B
05P0740
COMB
DSP
(DSC)
05P0733
TX/RX
AP-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit FS-5070T (1)
05P0741
TX-FIL Board
(Inside)
05P0737A
SW-REG Board
05P0744
RELAY Board
AP-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit FS-5070T (2)
05P0740
COMB Board
(Inside)
COMB
05P0739A
PA Board
05P0762
RX-FIL Board
05P0734A
W/R Board
05P0733
TX-RX Board
05P0760
TX Board
05P0732B
T-CPU Board
(Inside)
(Upper)
05P0764
PWR Board
05P0758
TB Board,
(Lower)
05P0757
T-I/F Board
05P0738A
DRV Board
05P0765
DIV Board
05P0759
MB Board
(underneath)
05P0751B
DSP Board
(DSC)
05P0751A
DSP Board
(NBDP)
AP-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Control unit FS-2571C
05P0810
PANEL Board
05P0811A
C-CPU Board
05P0812A
C-IF Board
AP-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FURUNO
FS-1570/2570/5070
SPECIFICATIONS OF SSB RADIOTELEPHONE
FS-1570/2570/5070
1
MF/HF DIGITAL RADIOTELEPHONE
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Communication system Full-duplex*1, semi-duplex or simplex
1.1.2 Class of emission
J3E: Telephone
J2B (F1B): DSC and NBDP
H3E: reception only
1.1.3 Frequency range
1.1.4 Number of channel
100.00 kHz to 29,999.99 kHz
User programmable: 256 TX/RX pairs
All ITU channels incorporated (include DSC/NBDP channel)
2182 kHz (single action)
1.1.5 Display method
1.1.6 Backlight
Monochrome LCD (180 x 96 dots)
8 tones
1.1.7 Contrast
64 steps
1.1.8 Warming up
1 minute approx. (oven 20 minutes approx.)
*1: Operating frequency should not be higher than 22 MHz for full-duplex communication,
FS-5070 only
1.2 TRANSMITTER
1.2.1 Frequency range
1.2.2 RF output power
1,606.5 kHz to 26.175 MHz (100 Hz step)
FS-1570: 1.6 kHz-4 MHz: 75/100 Wpep (J3E, J2B (F1B))
4.0-26.175 MHz, 150 Wpep (J3E, J2B (F1B))
FS-2570: 1.6-4.00 MHz, 75/100/200 Wpep (J3E, J2B
(F1B))Wpep
FS-5070: 1.6-4.0 MHz, 400 Wpep, 4kHz-26.175 MHz: 500
Wpep*2
1.2.3 Frequency error
1.2.4 Modulation AF response
1.2.5 Modulation system
1.2.6 AF Input
Within ±10 Hz
350 Hz to 2.7 kHz (SSB)
Low power balanced modulation
-46 dBm/600 ohm (Handset/Microphone)
0 dBm/600 ohm
1.2.7 Line in
*2: RF output power should be restricted to 400W on NBDP.
1.3 RECEIVER
1.3.1 Receiving system
1.3.2 Frequency range
Double-conversion superheterodyne
100 kHz-29,999.99 kHz (10 Hz step)
SP - 1
E5656S01A-M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FURUNO
FS-1570/2570/5070
1.3.3 Sensitivity
Input level at 10 ohm+250 pF (below 4 MHz) and 50 ohm
(above 4MHz) to produce SINAD 20 dB
Frequency Range
100 kHz to 300 kHz
300 kHz to 1.6 MHz
1.6 MHz to 4.0 MHz
4.0 MHz to 30 MHz
J3E/H3E
35 dBµV
25 dBµV
13 dBµV
7 dBµV
1.4 Intermediate frequency 1st: 72,455 kHz, 2nd: 455 kHz
1.5 Selectivity
J3E: 2.4kHz at -6dB, H3E: 6kHz at -6dB, J2B (F1B): 300Hz at –6dB
1.6 Inter-modulation
1.7 Spurious response
1.8 AGC
Better than 80 dBµV
Better than 70 dB
SLOW/FAST/OFF
1.9 BFO frequency
1.10 Audio output power
Telex/DSC: 1,700 Hz, Facsimile: 1,900 Hz
FS-1570/2570:
Internal speaker: 3W/8 ohm
External speaker: 4W/4 ohm
Internal speaker: 1W/8 ohm
External speaker: 3W/4 ohm
FS-5070:
Handset: 2.5mW/150 ohm, Line output: 0 dBm/600 ohm
Noise Blanker, Voice-activated squelch, Pre-selector
1.11 Standard features
2
DSC/WATCH KEEPING RECEIVER
2.1 DIGITAL SELECTIVE CALLING
2.1.1 Frequency shift
2.1.2 Baud rate
2.1.3 Protocol
Space: 1785.0 ± 0.5 Hz, Mark: 1615.0 ± 0.5 Hz
100 bps ± 30 x 10-6
FS-1570/2570: ITU-R Rec.M493-10, M541-8, M1082-1
FS-5070: ITU-R Rec.493-11, 541-9
AFSK
2.1.4 Modulation
2.1.5 Distress alarm
2.1.6 Distress alarm memory
3.5 s to 4.5 s self-repetition
50 messages
2.2 DSC/WATCH RECEIVER (FS-1570/2570)
2.2.1 Frequency range
DISTRESS
2187.5/ 8414.5 and 4207.5/ 6312/12577/16804.5 kHz
ROUTINE
2187.5 kHz
2.2.2 Class of emission
2.2.3 Antenna impedance
2.2.4 Local oscillator
2.2.5 Frequency stability
F1B, J2B
50 ohm
1st: F+54,455 kHz, 2nd: 54,000 kHz, 3rd: 456.7 kHz
±10 Hz
2.2.6 Intermediate frequency 1st: 54,455 kHz, 2nd: 455 kHz
SP - 2
E5656S01A-M
080414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FURUNO
FS-1570/2570/5070
2.2.7 Selectivity
-6 dB: 270 Hz to 300 Hz, -30 dB: within ± 380 Hz,
-60 dB: within ± 550 Hz
2.2.8 Receiving system
2.2.9 Radiation
Double-conversion superheterodyne
within 4 nW
2.2.10 RX error rate
2.2.11 Spurious response
1 % or less at 1 µV input voltage
31.6mV non-modulated at 10µV input voltage,
at error rate within 1%
2.2.12 Scanning reception
2.2.13 Diagnosis
max. 6 frequencies within 2 s (MF/HF)
Transmit high frequency signal of DSC
2.3 DSC/WATCH RECEIVER (FS-5070)
2.3.1 Frequency range
DISTRESS
2187.5/ 8414.5 and 4207.5/ 6312/12577/16804.5 kHz
ROUTINE
1,606.5 kHz to 27.5 MHz
F1B, J2B
2.3.2 Class of emission
2.3.3 Antenna impedance
2.3.4 Local oscillator
2.3.5 Frequency stability
50 ohm
1st: F+54,455 kHz, 2nd: 54,000 kHz, 3rd: 456.7 kHz
±10 Hz
2.3.6 Intermediate frequency 1st: 54,455 kHz, 2nd: 455 kHz
2.3.7 Selectivity
-6 dB: 270 Hz to 300 Hz, -30 dB: within ± 380 Hz,
-60 dB: within ± 550 Hz
2.3.8 Receiving system
2.3.9 Radiation
Double-conversion superheterodyne
within 2 nW
2.3.10 RX error rate
2.3.11 Spurious response
1 % or less at 1 µV input voltage
31.6mV non-modulated at 10µV input voltage,
at error rate within 1%
2.3.12 Scanning reception
2.3.13 Diagnosis
max. 6 frequencies within 2 s (MF/HF)
Transmit high frequency signal of DSC
2.4 GENERAL Watch KEEPING receiver (FS-2570, option)
2.4.1 Frequency Range
2.4.2 Class of Emission
2.4.3 Antenna Impedance
2.4.4 Local Oscillator
1,606.5 kHz to 27.5 MHz
J2B, F1B
50 ohms
1st: F+54,455 kHz, 2nd: 54,000 kHz, 3rd: 456.7 kHz
within ±10 Hz
2.4.5 Frequency Stability
2.4.6 Intermediate Frequency 1st: 54,455 kHz, 2nd: 455 kHz
2.4.7 Selectivity
-6 dB: 270 Hz to 300 Hz,
-30 dB: within ± 380 Hz,
SP - 3
E5656S01A-M
080414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FURUNO
FS-1570/2570/5070
-60 dB: within ±550 Hz
2.4.8 Receiving System
2.4.9 Radiation
Double-conversion superheterodyne
within 2 nW
2.4.10 RX Error Rate
2.4.11 Spurious Response
1 % or less at 1 μV input voltage
31.6 mV non-modulated at 10μV input voltage,
at error rate within 1%
2.4.12 Scanning Reception
2.4.13 Diagnosis
max. 6 frequencies within 2 s (MF/HF)
Transmit high frequency signal of DSC
3
NBDP FUNCTION (OPTION)
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Communication mode ARQ, FEC, DIRC (FSK)
3.1.2 Protocol
ID code
ITU-R M625-3, M476-5, M490, M491-1, M492-6
4, 5, 9 column
Line cord
4B/3Y (Intl.)
Modulation
AFSK
Tone frequency
1615/1785Hz ± 0.5 Hz (mark/space)
±80 Hz
Tracking range
3.1.3 Applications
Auto-reception
Setting timer and frequency (max. 10 settings available)
10 group max., 20 station as each group
100 channels max.
Frequency scanning
User-channels
3.2 TERMINAL UNIT IB-581 (FS-1570/2570)
3.2.1 Display
3.2.2 CPU
9.5” monochrome LCD, 680 x 480 dots
ALI M6117 (33 MHz)
Flash ROM 2 MB, DRAM 2 MB
1.44MB 3.5”
3.2.3 Memory
3.2.4 FD Drive
3.2.5 Keyboard
82 keys, IBM PS/2
3.3 TERMINAL UNIT IB-583
3.3.1 Display
10.4” color TFT LCD, 640 x 480 dots
HD6417615 (15.5 MHz)
3.3.2 CPU
3.3.3 Memory
Flash ROM: 1 MB, S-RAM: 256 KB
1.44MB 3.5”
3.3.4 FD drive
3.3.5 Keyboard
3.3.6 Other functions
82 keys, IBM PS/2
Text editor, FD control, Printer, Remote control for Transceiver,
Diagnosis
SP - 4
E5656S01A-M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FURUNO
FS-1570/2570/5070
4
ANTENNA COUPLER (FS-1570/2570)
4.1 Tuning System
4.2 Frequency Range
4.3 Input Impedance
4.4 Antenna
CPU controlled fully automatic tuning system
1.6 MHz to 27.5Hz
50 ohms
7m to 18m wire or whip antenna
150 W (FS-1570), 250 W (FS-2570)
1.5 max
4.5 Power Capability
4.6 VSWR
4.7 Tuning Speed
4.8 Dummy Load
Within 15 s
FS-1570: 10 ohms+250 pF/100W
FS-2570: 10 ohms+250 pF/200W
5
ANTENNA COUPLER (FS-5070)
5.1 Tuning system
5.2 Frequency range
5.3 Input impedance
5.4 Antenna
CPU controlled fully automatic tuning system
1.6MHz to 29.9 MHz
50 ohm (viewed from transceiver)
10 m to 18 m wire or whip antenna + wire
10 W
5.5 Pre-tuning power
5.6 VSWR
less than 1.5
5.7 Tuning time
5.8 Antenna BK relay
0.2 to 2 seconds typical (within 2 to 15 seconds)
Internal, optional supply
6
INTERFACE
6.1 Input data sentences
Ship’s Position (L/L)
Time
IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183-3)
GGA>RMC>GLL
ZDA
7
POWER SUPPLY
7.1 Transceiver/control unit FS-1570: 24 VDC, 0.8 A, max. 20A (TX)
FS-2570: 24 VDC, 1.5 A, max. 35A (TX)
FS-5070: 24 VDC, 3 A (RX), max. 35 A (TX)
7.2 Terminal unit
IB-581: 24VDC, 0.8 A
IB-583: 24 VDC: 0.6 A
7.3 Printer (PP-510)
24 VDC: 1.5 A
7.4 AC/DC power supply unit
100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1Ø, 50/60Hz
8
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
8.1 Ambient temperature
Indoor units
-15°C to +55°C
Antenna coupler
-25°C to +55°C
8.2 Relative humidity
93% or less at 40°C
SP - 5
E5656S01A-M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FURUNO
FS-1570/2570/5070
8.3 Degree of protection
Control unit
IPX2 (panel), IPX0 (chassis)
Transceiver/terminal unit IPX0
Antenna coupler
IPX5 (FS-1570/2570), IPX6 (FS-5070)
8.4 Bearing vibration
2 Hz-5Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude: ±1 mm±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Max. acceleration 7m/s2, fixed
9
COATING COLOR
9.1 Control/terminal unit
9.2 Transceiver unit
9.3 Antenna coupler
N3.0 (panel), 2.5GY5/1.5 (chassis)
2.5GY5/1.5
N9.5 (white)
SP - 6
E5656S01A-M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
1/ RT/2182 key ............................................1-2
2/DSC key ...................................................1-1
4/Intcom key ................................................1-6
7/ key.......................................................1-4
8/PRINT key ..............................................6-19
NBDP Terminal Unit
answerback code registration................. 8-1
communications buffer........................10-10
edit menu [F2] ......................................... 7-7
file deleting.............................................. 9-8
file editing................................................ 9-3
file menu [F1] .......................................... 7-6
file opening.............................................. 9-7
file renaming............................................ 9-7
file saving ................................................ 9-2
file saving under new name.................... 9-8
ID code registration................................. 8-2
macrofiles............................................10-10
manual calling .......................................10-1
menu overview........................................ 7-4
operate menu [F3]...................................7-8
printing..................................................... 9-8
scan channel group editing, deleting...... 8-8
scan channel group registration..............8-7
station editing, deleting ........................... 8-4
station menu [F5] ..................................7-10
station registration................................... 8-3
system menu [F6].................................. 7-11
timer program editing, deleting ............... 8-6
timer program registration....................... 8-5
user channel registration......................... 8-6
window menu [F4]...................................7-9
NBDP Terminal Unit
9/
key .....................................................1-2
Channel selection........................................2-2
Contrast.......................................................1-4
Control description.......................................1-1
Dimmer........................................................1-4
Distress alert
receiving on either VHF channel 70 or MF
channel 2187.5........................................4-7
receiving on HF band ............................4-10
sending ....................................................4-2
Distress relay
on behalf of other ship, to area ships....4-18
on behalf of other ship, to coast station 4-14
receiving ................................................4-21
to coast station on HF band ..................4-10
DSC frequency table ................................AP-3
Error messages.........................................11-4
Frequency selection ....................................2-3
Geographical area call
receiving ................................................5-18
sending ..................................................5-16
Group call
receiving ................................................5-14
sending ..................................................5-12
IA .................................................................2-4
IC .................................................................2-4
Individual call
ARQ mode ............................................10-3
FEC mode.............................................10-5
general test ........................................... 11-8
receive mode.........................................10-5
scanning................................................10-9
terminal unit............................................. 7-1
timer operation......................................10-8
tone test ................................................ 11-9
Neutral craft call
manual acknowledge...............................5-9
Intercom.......................................................1-6
Key Assignment.........................................6-22
Log file
description .............................................5-36
opening..................................................5-36
LOG/TUNE key..........................................5-36
Medical transport call
receiving................................................5-20
sending..................................................5-19
Polling call
receiving ................................................5-23
sending ..................................................5-21
Menu tree .................................................AP-1
receiving................................................5-24
Position call
other ship requests your position..........5-28
POWER knob.............................................. 1-2
IN-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Print out menu...........................................6-19
PSTN call
printing .................................................. 6-12
PSTN call ................................................ 6-9
Test call ..................................................... 11-6
Transmitter power....................................... 2-4
Troubleshooting ........................................ 11-3
Tuning ......................................................... 2-3
USER CH menu.......................................... 2-8
User channels
charge information.................................5-35
receiving ................................................5-33
sending..................................................5-30
RF................................................................2-4
Scan frequency setup................................6-21
Send message call
test call...................................................6-10
Send message files
deleting.................................................... 6-4
registering ............................................... 6-2
VC ............................................................... 2-4
group call.................................................6-8
individual call ...........................................6-4
IN-2
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, Japan
Tel: +81 (798) 65-2111 Fax: +81 (798) 65-4200
www.furuno.co.jp
Publication No. DOC-1027
Declaration of Conformity
0560
We
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Manufacturer)
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Address)
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone Type FS-1570 consisting of Control unit FS-2570C/FS-2571C, Transceiver unit FS-
1570T, Handset/Bracket HS-2001/HS-2003/HCS701K-B20, Antenna coupler AT-1560-15, Incoming call indicator IC-303-
DSC, Telex distress alert button IC-302-DSC, Alarm unit IC-350, NBDP-controller monochrome display IB-581, NBDP-
controller color display IB-582/IB-583, Printer PP-510, Printer switch box IF-8500, Distress message controller DMC-5, 2.6
m active whip antenna for WKR FAX-5, External loudspeaker SEM-21Q and AC power supply PR-300/PR-850A
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Model name, type number)
to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document(s)
Standards
Test standards
IMO Resolutions MSC.36(63), A.694(17)
IMO Resolutions MSC.68(68), A.806(19)
IMO MSC Circular MSC/Circ.862
ETS 300 338: 1995-11, ETS 300 373: 1995-08,
ETS 300 067 A1: 1998-11, EN 301 033 V1.1.1: 1998-08
EN 60945: 1997-01, EN 61162-1: 2000-07
ITU-R Recommendations
M.1173, M.1082-1, M.821-1, M.493-10, M.493-11, M.493-12, M.541-8, M.541-9,
M.476-5, M491-1. M.492-6, M.625-3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))
For assessment, see
• EC type-examination (Module B) certificate No: 02212010/AA/04 of 02 July 2008 issued by Telefication, The
Netherlands
• Product Quality System (Module D) certificate No. P 112 of 20 May 2005 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands
• Test report 98752230, 98752232 and 98752234 of 17 June 2002 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands
• Test reports FLI 12-02-019 of 20 May 2002, FLI 12-02-036 of 30 August 2002, FLI 12-08-014/Rev.A/FLI 12-08-
024/Rev.A of 11 June 2008 and FLI 12-08-028/FLI 12-08-030 of 30 June 2008 issued by Furuno Labotech
International Co., Ltd.
This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine
equipment modified by Commission Directive 2002/75/EC.
On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.
Hiroaki Komatsu
Manager,
International Rules and Regulations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)
Nishinomiya City, Japan
July 9.2008
------------------------------------------------------
(Place and date of issue)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, Japan
Tel: +81 (798) 65-2111 Fax: +81 (798) 65-4200
www.furuno.co.jp
Publication No. DOC-1028
Declaration of Conformity
0560
We
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Manufacturer)
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Address)
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
MF/HF SSB Radiotelephone Type FS-2570 consisting of Control unit FS-2570C/FS-2571C, Transceiver unit FS-
2570T, Handset/Bracket HS-2001/HS-2003/HCS701K-B20, Antenna coupler AT-1560-25, Incoming call indicator IC-303-
DSC, Telex distress alert button IC-302-DSC, Alarm unit IC-350, NBDP-controller monochrome display IB-581, NBDP-
controller color display IB-582/583, Printer PP-510, Printer switch box IF-8500, Distress message controller DMC-5, 2.6 m
active whip antenna for WKR FAX-5, External loudspeaker SEM-21Q and AC power supply PR-850A
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Model name, type number)
to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document(s)
Standards
Test standards
IMO Resolutions MSC.36(63), A.694(17)
IMO Resolutions MSC.68(68), A.806(19)
IMO MSC Circular MSC/Circ.862
ETS 300 338: 1995-11, ETS 300 373: 1995-08,
ETS 300 067 A1: 1998-11, EN 301 033 V1.1.1: 1998-08
EN 60945: 1997-01, EN 61162-1: 2000-07
ITU-R Recommendations
M.1173, M.1082-1, M.821-1, M.493-10, M.493-11, M.493-12, M.541-8, M.541-9,
M.476-5, M491-1. M.492-6, M.625-3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))
For assessment, see
EC type-examination (Module B) certificate No: 02212010/AA/04 of 02 July 2008 issued by Telefication, The
•
Netherlands
•
•
Product Quality System (Module D) certificate No. P 112 of 20 May 2005 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands
Test report 98752231, 98752233 and 98752235 of 17 June 2002 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands
• Test reports FLI 12-02-019 of 20 May 2002 and FLI 12-02-036 of 30 August 2002, FLI 12-08-014/Rev.A/FLI 12-08-
024/Rev.A of 11 June 2008 and FLI 12-08-028/FLI 12-08-030 of 30 June 2008 issued by Furuno Labotech
International Co., Ltd.
This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine
equipment modified by Commission Directive 2002/75/EC.
On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.
Hiroaki Komatsu
Manager,
International Rules and Regulations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)
Nishinomiya City, Japan
July 9, 2008
------------------------------------------------------
(Place and date of issue)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, Japan
Tel: +81 (798) 65-2111 Fax: +81 (798) 65-4200
www.furuno.co.jp
Publication No.DOC-1029
Declaration of Conformity
0560
We
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Manufacturer)
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Address)
declare under our sole responsibility that the product
HF/MFSSBRadiotelephonewithintegratedDSC andNBDPType:FS-5070consistingofTransceiverunit
FS-5070T,ControlunitFS-2571C,AntennacouplerAT-5000,Handset/BracketHS-2003,DistressalertunitIC-
302-DSC,ReceivingcallunitIC-303-DSC,Alarm unitIC-350,TerminalunitIB-583,KeyboardBTC-5100C,
InterfaceIF-8500,Pre-amplifierFAX-5,ExternalloudspeakerSEM21Q,BKinterfaceBK-300,PrinterPP-510,
AC powersupplyPR-850AandPowerstatusmonitorPSM-01
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Model name, type number)
to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document(s)
Standards
Test standards
IMO Resolutions MSC.36(63), A.694(17)
IMO Resolutions MSC.68(68), A.806(19)
IMO MSC Circular MSC/Circ.862
EN 300 338 V1.2.1: 1999-04, EN 300 373-1 V1.2.1: 2002-10
ETS 300 067: 1990-11, ETS 300 067/A1: 1993-11
EN 301 033 V1.1.1: 1998-08
EN 60945: 2002-10, EN 61162-1: 2000-07
ITU-R Recommendations
M.1173, M.1082-1, M.821-1, M.493-10, M.493-11, M.493-12, M.541-8, M.541-9,
M.476-5, M491-1. M.492-6, M.625-3
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))
For assessment, see
EC type-examination (Module B) certificate No: 06212004/AA/01 of 02 July 2008 issued by Telefication, The
•
Netherlands
•
•
Product Quality System (Module D) certificate No. P 112 of 20 May 2005 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands
Test report 98752231, 98752233 and 98752235 of 17 June 2002 issued by Telefication, The Netherlands
• Test reports FLI 12-02-019 of 20 May 2002 and FLI 12-02-036 of 30 August 2002, FLI 12-08-014/Rev.A/FLI 12-08-
024/Rev.A of 11 June 2008 and FLI 12-08-028/FLI 12-08-030 of 30 June 2008 issued by Furuno Labotech
International Co., Ltd.
This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine
equipment modified by Commission Directive 2002/75/EC.
On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.
Hiroaki Komatsu
Manager,
International Rules and Regulations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)
Nishinomiya City, Japan
July 9, 2008
------------------------------------------------------
(Place and date of issue)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|